Home

Panasonic KX-TEA308 Feature Guide

1. 254 Account Code Mode 605 2 24 022 0 4 255 Gall Trarisferto CO Line 606 iere E AL earns 255 Call Forwarding to CO Line 6071 02 42 4 0 0 255 Executive Busy Override 608 2 ar erect el ce ETUR EHE LU du eet 256 IDNID Overtide TE rrr rte 256 Parallelled Telephone 6101 4 022250 nennen nnne nennen nnne innen 256 WAM Extension G4 A 257 Room Monitor 612 EE 257 CO Line Call Duration Limitation 613 257 Internal Pulse Detection 6141 258 Eanguage 65 ieee 258 Extension Name in Cyrillic 616 nennen nennen 258 Message Waiting for Another Extension 6181 259 SLT Message Waiting 619 nennen nennen nennen nennt 259 LES Recording Mode Set 620 5 1 2 0 a aA ened ees 260 BV Resource 621 e 260 BV for Extension 622 e nene e a
2. 226 Transfer Recall Time 20T Lis eee 226 Call Forwarding Start Time 0021 2 000 000000000 0 0000 1 8 000 nennen neret 226 Hotline Waiting Time 203 coit recorte Late Ente a i Mien nen 226 Call Duration Counter Start 204 oo ecceeeceseneeeeeeceeeseeeseaeeeeeeaeesaeeseeeesaeseaeeeaeesaeeseeeseeseaeseneeesieeseeeeeaeetaas 226 CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 2 0 44 42 200 10 000000 nennen enne n nente nnns 227 Dialling Start Time 2006 tinere ee e xen deste iu iaito 227 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 2007 227 Time 208 227 DUMP 1210 227 No Dial Discorinection 2171 iiri tire tr ere tr 228 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 nennen 228 Bell off Detection 21 3 M EET 228 BV Recording Time 214 P X 228 Common Personal BV OGM Recording Time 215 229 Carrier Exception Code 3001 2 22222 4 2 000 00000000 nennen 229 TRS System Speed Dialling Class
3. 251 UCD Busy Waiting Time 211 02 4 4 0 0 0000 nennen neret reser etre 251 UCD OGM Message Interval Time 522 ssssesssssssseeeeneenne nennen nennen nnne nnne 251 UCD Busy Mode 523 ineo ELLE nd ee ee 251 UCD Intercept Mode 524 sssessssssessesseseeeen nenne nenne nennen nnne nn nene nnn ette etnies tenet nr senes 252 UCD Ring Time before Intercept 525 a aari aa nnne nennen 252 UCD Ring Time after Intercept 5261 252 UCD Waiting Message 527 252 DISA Security Code Digits 530 enne nnne ennt nennt nnne nnns enne 252 DISA Ringback Tone 31 2 ie ud E RC e din 253 3 level AA Assignment 540 5491 253 Clear All OGMs of DISA UCD 599 253 Extension Group 600 21 5 internen nett exe espe six erp 254 TRS COS Day Night LUNCh 601 603 254 6041
4. 85 External z ucf Wir 86 Outside Line Gall EImiltStiDli scie es ES ue ppt cu xxt t a a 87 ucijseMI e c 88 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 89 licut nili 90 PEAS TM ste ee nian 90 Holding EE KEELE MEN FEE ETE an KERN ERU NE ERE XE RUAXRKREERIKU LEM KM EAER 92 80 92 94 Call ONE RETE 95 Musicon E 96 Consultation Hold M 97 jeudi 98 Conference Features e E 98 Conference 98 lose PL M 99 Paging Features 101 Paging eee 101 Optional Device Features eorom ann ba centu tena in nth cmn nuo ansa 102 Doonphone aM REC
5. This character is only available with the CE Central Europe and PD Poland models when programming Currency 921 204 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Table 3 Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU Russia UA Ukraine model N Buttons 8iv lzclejlan jo uio mie lt M oe This character is only available for the KX T7735RU Example of Entering Characters To enter Ann OR 6 5times FWD DND toggle between Alphabet mode and Numeral mode or between Alphabet mode Cyrillic alphabet mode assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic 616 and Numeral mode press SELECT move the cursor right press gt To delete all characters press CLEAR To delete a character press lt Feature Guide 205 3 3 PT Programming List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone ARS Automatic Route Selection B BGM Background Music BV Built in Voice Message CO Outside CO Line COS Class of Service CPC Calling Party Control D DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Not Disturb DRD Distinctive Ring Detection DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency E
6. 242 GO Line Ring Tone Patterm 423 Docente ie ON eee 242 Polarity Reverse Detection 424 84 243 Collect Call Block 425 Brazil only ssssesseeeeeeeeeeeneennennen nennen nennen 243 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD 426 New Zealand only 243 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 427 429 New Zealand only 244 DRD Ring Pattern Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand only 244 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone 433 434 New Zealand seem 245 10 Feature Guide DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 0 eterne nennen 245 Gall Charge Calculation 441 2 5 2 2 0 tete cnni taire cote erret ceo ve eo pecie re rto E eic eu De deca cuo diane 245 Call Charge Table Assignment 42 246 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 246 DISA Built in AA 501 246 FAX Connection b09 nenii eei iter Pepe ere aoe ie i EE Deer TER euo 247 DISA Delayed Answer Time 504 sssessessseeseeeseeeeennnennnen nennen nennen nennen nnne 247 DISA Wait T
7. 4 continue cone ev 11 rds 0 9 X To continue 2 Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 Emergency Number 309 em continue 3 6 8 vex rone i u 2 To continue SEEN Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Account Code 310 en continue s 3 5 ve rone 1 25 To continue 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry 1 8 2 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code Account Code Mode 605 230 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Automatic Pause Insertion Code 311 i Next Prev NEXT or PREV To continue 3 1 Eer rone ew ie A E To continue ns Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 7 Pause Insertion Pause Time 417 TRS Extension Lock Class 312 ees teres s COS 2 5 Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS 1 8 4 Extension Lock ARS Selection 350 To continue AAO 3 Enable Disable Te continue Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Route 1 4 Selection Code S 1 I i NEXT or PREV lt _ To continue 3 X rone 2 1
8. Conditions e Touse this feature DISA must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 and DISA AA service must be assigned as the destination of incoming outside CO line calls via the DISA feature DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 The Log in or Log out status can be set for each extension 1 2 4 Log in Log out The last member of a group cannot log out The Delayed Ringing feature does not apply to DISA or Direct In Line DIL calls If the destination is a DISA ring group this feature will function Feature Guide References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 2 2 Group 28 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 4 Log in Log out Description Members of an idle extension hunting group Direct Inward System Access DISA ring group or Uniform Call Distribution UCD group can join Log in or leave Log out groups manually Group members can log in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls and log out at the end of the work shift Conditions last member of a group cannot log out e While logged out from a group a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA UCD or Idle Extension Hunting features Log in Log out Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log in Log out button It shows the current status as
9. DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires d I Cyclic tone Fax CNG tone Y Y CPC signal A number is dialled Nothing is dialled The call is sent to the fax extension Is a security code required No The call is disconnected Busy tone What is the security mode Trunk or No Tre secun y s Intercept Routing code is entered employed Y Yes One short beep The code is correct Y Goes to C The callis disconnected Make an outside Y Y CO line call m Y CO The code is incorrect The call is The call reaches the destination Reorder tone established Y T DISA Ring Time before The call is The call is Intercept expires disconnected established Y The call 2 The call is not answered The destination ME extension s is are busy ope y The call is What is the DISA disconnected Busy Mode gt Disconnect Call Waiting DISA Busy tone s DISA IRNA to BV DISA Ring Time assigned before Intercept expires busy DISA Y Y OGM is heard oa d The call is The call is not Y established answered Goes to Y The call is sent to another extension DISA Ring Time afte
10. follows Light Pattern Status Red on Logged out Off Logged in Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 2 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 5 4 Leaving a Group Log in Log out Feature Guide 29 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 31 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND OVERVIEW Description When an extension user cannot answer calls is on a call out of the office etc it is possible to forward or refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features 1 Call Forwarding FWD 2 Do Not Disturb DND 1 FWD Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 2 DND An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Conditions FWD DND Button If a proprietary telephone PT does not have an FWD DND button a flexible CO button can be customised as an FWD DND button Button Status The FWD DND button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status Red on DND on Slow red flashing FWD on Off FWD DND off Setting a new FWD mode such as All Calls or Bu
11. 18 13 9 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection iioc iie tri edito ea ge sie ag ve pute 19 1 1 3 4 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New 7 20 11 95 Call Waiting E i Nao EATE Eiaa 22 1 2 Receiving Group Features aiesisccisicccccccsssciccccnisscacseceenscesticnnnvctnsscesnndcccenenwuresecnasensieacnee 23 1 2 1 idle Extension HUNN EREE 23 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD tate o bee 25 1 2 8 Direct Inward System Access DISA 28 12 4 lL 11d Log DU i iu ei EE DE Ree pra Epis E eee boe EID 29 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 30 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb 30 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND OVERVIEW ssssssseeeeeneneneeeeen nennen 30 1312 Gall Forwarding FWD ae 31 1 31 9 Do Not Disturb entitles 34 1 4 Answering PO ALUN GS uacua insuz nain ida xx RA DU EM IS a SESEFRU XN KMS ZUM SC Un FEMA S 35 1 4 1 Answering Features EU 35 1 4 1 1 Answering Features OVERVIEW 35 1 41 2 Dine Preterence lncoming irr
12. were successfully performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy Confirmation Tone 3 Before the following features activate Retrieving a held call e Picking up another call Establishing a conference call Paging Answering a paging announcement Feature Guide 283 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Ring Tone Patterns Ring Tone Patterns The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types outside CO line intercom or doorphone calls or are fixed for certain features Hold Recall outside CO line calls intercom calls Timed Reminder or Camp on Recall Single e Selectable outside CO line calls intercom calls doorphone calls Fixed Hold Recall outside CO line calls Double 22216 e Selectable outside la line calls intercom calls LI M 11 doorphone calls Fixed Hold Recall intercom calls Triple j Selectable outside CO 5 M Phop doorphone calls Fixed Timed Reminder S Double e Selectable doorphone T T ALL e Fixed Camp on Recall Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company New Zealand only The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside CO line Pattern 1 2216 EH EH Pattern 2 1s pen vs 15 M 284 Feat
13. 202 3 3 1 Programming Instructions secet 202 3 3 2 Programming PrOOSdUrBS Pat buco 207 Se iinet e cT 207 Feature Guide System Speed Dialling Number 001 nnne nennen nennen nnns 207 System PassWord 002 208 DSS Console Jack Assignment 003 209 Console Paired Teleptione 004 32 1 iiie eu Eze epe alain hides 209 One touch Transfer Using DSS Button 005 209 Time Service Switching Mode 006 d cei dL eL pea ene dede 210 Time Service Start Time 007 210 Operator Assignment 008 210 Extension Number 009 1 dcus ierat ntn 211 Kel Enur derze vanume U 211 System Speed Dialling Name 01 1 sss nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne nes 212 Second Feature Numbering Plan 012 212 KX T7710 One touch Dialling 019 2 12 rrt recie edite ceret ee eh citro rette aedes etico deese cen podus 213 Hunting Group Set 1001 0 22222 0 0 2 000 00 000000000000 nnne nnnennnn tnn ennn entren rese nene terrere n trennen nennen 213
14. ete ee E eE aaa pei eap base LE iR S code et 36 US EE ue oEE E 37 1 4 1 4 Hards tree Answerback ere reed iia deed i netted tad stupet eden tee din 38 1 5 Making Call Features e 39 1 5 1 Intercom Call Features iios 39 1 5 1 1 nitzIree Meri e ERR 39 1 5 2 Outside CO Line Call 41 1 5 2 1 Outside CO Line Call 41 1 55 2 2 Emergency Call Hi to Ee din hindi Ale SOL te dee 42 1 5 2 3 ACCOUNT Code en 43 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selecto rrinin e er eee inlet aril ene iii Demian 44 1 5 2 5 Reverse 45 UE E OUI m EM 46 W527 Pause Diae RC 47 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host 48 1 5 3 Seizing a Line Features vam ceacuenieesasmannsentuieqaatenecnagetins 50 1 5 3 1 Seizing a Line Features OVERVIEW 1 nennen nent nnn tren e nnns ernst 50 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing ssssseese
15. remotely Time Service Switches the time service Not required 2 2 3 Time mode manually Service Remote Timed Reminder Wake up Sets or cancels Timed Not required 1 21 2 Timed Call Reminder to any extension Reminder Incoming Call Log in the Common Area CLEAR ALL Clears all Caller ID information stored in the common area Not required 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Feature Guide 179 2 2 System Configuration Software 180 Feature Description Manager Password Details in Incoming Call Log Display Lock in the Common Area Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log for the common area Not required 1 8 4 Extension Lock 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area Selects how new calls are treated when Incoming Call Log for the common area is full Not required 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD Records and plays back OGMs used by DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD and 3 level Automated Attendant AA Erases OGMs used by DISA and UCD Not required 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD Date and Time Setting Adjusts the current date and time Not required Extension Lock CANCEL ALL Cancels Extension Lock Incoming Call Log Display Lock in the Personal Area and Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock at all extensions Not required
16. 0 9 continue 52 for Route 2 53 for Route 3 54 for Route 4 e Feature Guide 231 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Route 1 4 Exception Code 355 358 NEXT or PREV puri ea To continue eee 55 58 Max ae 55 for ae 0 9 To continue 56 for Route 2 57 for Route 3 58 for Route 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1st Carrier Selection Code slit 3 5 9 ber mle Max 4 digits 0 9 Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS Modification Removed Digits 360 i wexr Prev NEXT or PREV 2 To continue 3 6 0 vex NEXT ec 2 2 STORE store eno To continue ax T Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 232 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming ARS Modification Added Number 361 i Next prev or PREV 46 eR eee To continue DOO m emm 4 20 digits 0 9 X To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS Dial Tone 362 eer gen eroe uer Tone1 Tone2 Feature amp Programming References 1 22 1 D
17. Voice Mail VM Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration Conditions e Extension button confirmation A display PT user can confirm the button settings such as the flexible CO button by pressing the corresponding button while on hook Day Night Lunch and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an extension assigned as the operator or manager User Manual References 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Feature Guide 139 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 3 LED Indication Description The LED Light Emitting Diode of the Message Ringer Lamp and the following buttons Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns Line Status Buttons Single CO S CO Group CO G CO Other CO O CO INTERCOM Corresponding Extension Status Button Direct Station Selection DSS 1 Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp e ncoming call from an outside CO line another extension Red flashing e Message s present no incoming call Red messages present and no incoming call Off 2 Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Button Outside CO Line Status marcom Line Status Light Pattern G CO INTERCOM Off Idle Green on This extension is using th
18. 130 220 VM Voice Mail Features 144 Voice Mail APT Integration 144 Voice Mail Features 144 Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration 149 W WalkingCOS 73 Warning Tone Outside CO Line Call Limitation 283 Index Feature Guide 295 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 2005 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved PSQX3533WA KK0505MN4047
19. 179 2 3 System Data Cmte M OP 182 2 3 1 EC PIOS Oc eerte 182 2220 PT ProgramMMiNg ei a a aaa aa ett 185 2222 Automatic Time AdjUStMeENt 187 2 3 4 Feature Numbering RR c 188 2 3 5 X Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line 193 2 3 6 Country Setting Omm 194 4227 Firmware Upgrade 195 2 4 Fault Recovery DiagnosStics 2 ioa ud caua EE aad BACKEN MK EL DRM V KDE ca 196 2 4 1 Power Failure Ira IGI etic 196 CECI gr ilc 197 3 Programming lt 5 rrr 199 3 1 P 200 3 1 1 UU Ere E 200 3 2 PG 201 3 2 1 Installing and Starting KX TEA308 Maintenance 201 3 3 PT Programming ccininces ook nd Ad nad
20. Parallelled Telephone 610 When the SLT is in operation the display and LED Light Emitting Diode indicator on the paired PT will function in the same way as when the PT is in operation The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT A Call Splitting Conference Door Open while connected to the doorphone External Feature Access EFA Hot Line An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is n Hands free Answerback mode 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback n Voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is Playing background music BGM Receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker n programming mode Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls if the ringer is turned on If one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is having a call a 3 party conference call will be established If one telephone goes on hook the other telephone will continue with the call Installation Manual References 2 5 2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description A CPC Calling Party Control signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from an outside CO line when the other party hangs up To maintain
21. be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming SLT Caller ID Line Access Number 151 to be used when calling the caller back e lfacallis transferred forwarded or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT the original caller s information will be shown on the SLT e During a conversation Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT e When FSK type Caller ID information is received the caller s telephone number max 20 digits name max 16 characters date and time or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as Private Out of Area or Long Distance will be shown on the SLT If the caller s telephone number exceeds 20 digits the SLT receives only the first 20 digits If the caller s name exceeds 16 characters the SLT receives only the first 16 characters e When DTMF type Caller ID information is received the caller s telephone number max 16 digits or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT If the caller s telephone number exceeds 16 digits the SLT receives only the first 16 digits However when a value less than 1500 ms is set through system programming SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 the SLT receives only the first 10 digits e Depending on the type of SLT being used caller names and the dates and times that calls were received may not be able to be shown on the SLT e outside caller disconnects a call to an S
22. 1 8 4 Extension Lock 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log 1 17 1 Message Waiting erases a common BV OGM in the common message area that can be accessed by either the operator or manager LCS Password Control Clears the Live Call Not required 1 19 1 Voice Screening LCS password Mail APT Integration Common BV OGM Records plays back and Not required 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager manager password Operator Call An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number Automatic Line Access 121 often simply 0 If no operator is assigned the caller will hear a reorder tone If the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to 0 through system programming the Operator Call number will be changed to 9 Note For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 2 1 Control Features 3 2 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges Feature Guide 181 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 1 PC Programming 182 Description System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone PT 2 3 2 PT Programming System programming
23. Even when the call charge is set to 0 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation calls cannot be made if the budget limit of an extension has been reached However any numbers programmed as Emergency Numbers can be dialled regardless of this C Emergency Number 309 When an extension user makes an outside CO line call with multiple outside parties simultaneously for example using the conference call feature the extension s total remaining budget will not be divided by each outside CO line call This may cause the total of call charges to exceed the budget limit Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation User Manual References 3 2 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges Feature Guide 71 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 8 4 Extension Lock 72 Description Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use This is useful for situations when extension users must leave their desks temporarily Any 4 digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout Conditions Remote Extension Lock An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension using a Direct Station Selection DSS Console This feature functions only if the operator or manager has set the extension password When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely the extension s user cannot unlock it When a us
24. edged eee ee 260 BV Access Code through CO Line 625 sssssssssssneeneeeeenneen nennen nennen nnne 261 BGM Control for APT 626 261 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call 627 sss 261 SLT Caller ID 628 T 262 SLT Fixed Bell Patterri 629 iiron 262 LCD Display Mode 6301 02222 4 1 1 10 00000 nnnm nennen neret rris nnr et nrs tren 262 Feature Guide 11 12 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 3 Doorphone Ringing Day Night LUNCH 700 7021 nere 263 Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 ssessessssssssseseeeeee eene enne snnt nennen 263 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 sse 264 Doorphone Access 707 en at toe RR CO Rev 264 Doorphone Ring Time 708 nS 264 Door Open Duration 709 5 4 I re eret neh nen iii 265 Doorphone Ring Chitme 710 cisccesacecscccscecessecaseenseccaccenacedescenssdeuastencpastasiecerssccphacnaaeesatecententeersdensnderseceseagae 265 Doorphone Chime Assignment 711 essen nennen neret nnne nene 265 Doorphone Chime Pattern 712 nent tenens 266 SMDR RS 232C Parameter 800 sse nennen neret nen
25. 1 16 1 Caller ID Description The PBX can receive Caller ID information telephone numbers and callers names from calls received on outside CO lines This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones PTs as well as some single line telephones SLTs when receiving calls Additionally Caller ID information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call allowing the caller to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller s telephone number when it is received by for example adding an Outside CO Line Access number or adding deleting certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log without worrying about Outside CO Line Access numbers area codes etc Notes e Theterm Caller ID used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information sent from the telephone company and received on outside CO lines Your network provider may use a different name for this type of service e Toreceive Caller ID information you must subscribe to the telephone company s Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside CO lines through system programming Caller ID 900 e Caller ID signalling type FSK Frequency Shift Keying Bell 202 or V 23 DTMF Du
26. A414 Capacity of System 278 Capacity of System 4 278 Tones Ring NI 280 Tones Ring cM 280 Revision Y MP T 286 Version 286 4 3 1 11 22 gt 1 Feature Guide Seclion 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 13 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 Incoming Outside CO Line Call Features 1 1 1 1 Direct In Line DIL Description Directs incoming outside CO line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside CO line carrying the call Each outside CO line can have a different destination for each time service mode Programming Example The table can be programmed for each outside CO line Distribution method and destination Outside CO Line No Day Lunch Night 1 DIL 101 DIL 102 DIL 102 2 DIL 103 DIL 103 DIL 103 3 Normal Normal Normal Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 In this example If an outside CO line call is received on outside CO line 1
27. NEXT PREV DEL To continue AOD we sas Gon 2 To continue ins Feature amp Programming References 1 15 3 Doorbell Door Chime Doorphone Ring Chime 710 Feature Guide 265 3 3 PT Programming Doorphone Chime Pattern 2 ulcisci i cM To continue gog vec sue 2 s To continue 7 Feature amp Programming References 1 15 3 Doorbell Door Chime 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones SMDR RS 232C Parameter 800 Select the new line code Select the baud rate gt 8 99 rer aso CR LF CR 1200 2400 CR Carriage Return 5 LF Line Feed c the word E P the ers Er the a bit EST NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE 7 8 bits Mark Space 1 bit 2 bits Even Odd None Notes Select None when the printer does not require error checking The following combinations are invalid Parity Word length Stop bit length Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 If any of the above invalid combinations are selected an alarm tone will be heard Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 266 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming SMDR Parameter 801 Select the page length OOO tex 4 99 lines lt Select the skip perforation gt NEXT wext store STORE store
28. The KX T7710 has 2 modes NORMAL mode and PBX mode selected by a switch on the telephone This feature is available only when the KX T7710 is in PBX mode Programming Example KX T7710 One touch Dialling Location No Button Desired Number 1 One touch Dial 01 100 Front Desk 2 One touch Dial 02 76XX Wake up Call 3 One touch Dial 03 102 Restaurant Cont 9 MESSAGE 784 Conditions System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension SLT Message Waiting 619 If a user goes off hook with an SLT that has messages waiting a special dial tone dial tone 3 will be heard The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number Any feature number can be stored in a One touch button However the feature numbers for Personal Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling and Quick Dialling do not function KX T7710 One touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone KX T7710 One touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX T7710 is connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone PT Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX T7710 for additional information Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 57 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 4 Re
29. a Flexible CO buttons b Flexible DSS buttons C Programmable Feature PF buttons d Flexible MESSAGE button Button Usage Button Function Single CO S CO Used to access a specified outside CO line for making or receiving calls 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Group CO G CO Used to access an idle outside CO line in a specified outside CO line group for making calls Incoming calls from outside CO lines in the assigned outside CO line group arrive at this button 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Other CO O CO Used to access an idle outside CO line for making calls Incoming calls from the assigned outside CO lines which are not assigned to S CO or G CO buttons arrive at this button 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Direct Station Selection DSS Used to call an extension with a one touch operation 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call One touch Dialling Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one touch operation 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Message Used to leave a message waiting indication call back the party who left the message waiting indication or play back voice messages 1 17 1 Message Waiting Message for Another Extension Used to access messages except Built in Voice Message BV messages left for another extension or voice messages stored in another extension s Voice Processing System VPS mailbox
30. none 2 DSS para 3 To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature SMDR Account Code 805 QOD Ea ne Co CODE INDEX Feature amp Programming References 1 8 2 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Account Code 310 Account Code Mode 605 SMDR Language 806 JOE Cer ses Refer to the note Note The following languages are available for SMDR English Spanish Portuguese Greek Czech Hungarian Slovak Polish Italian Selections vary depending on your country area 268 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature BV Total Recording Time uc 8 0 7 SELECT STORE Eno 20 30 60 Note The recording quality depends on the setting time 20 min High 30 Normal 60 Low Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV BV Card Initialisation 808 DOA ww Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Caller ID 900 m continue 0 3 Enable Disable To continue Note The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside CO lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even if 0 s or s is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time 504 Feature
31. 1112224444 Location No Outside CO Line No Extension Jack No 3 1 CO 1 CO2 Jack 01 Jack 02 Jack 03 2 Jack 07 Jack 08 3 Not Stored Not Stored 1 SMS Centre Number for Receiving 145 2 SMS Routing Table CO 146 3 SMS Routing Table Extension 147 If the SMS centre supports sub address numbers up to 4 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS destinations for a single location One location can be used for each outside CO line telephone number Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features 2 SLT setting Extension Jack No SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for SMS Sub Sending Receiving address Jack 01 89 P 1112223333 1112224444 1 Jack 02 89 1 P 21112223333 1112224444 2 Jack 07 89 1 P 21112223333 1112224444 1 Cont 1 89 Outside CO Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside CO lines When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number the Automatic Line Access number or Outside CO Line Access number can also be used respectively 2 P Pause In this example To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01 enter 38470011 as the destination b To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02 enter 38470012 as the destination C send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 07 enter 38470021 as the dest
32. 4 1200 ms continue Feature amp Programming References 1 10 6 Flash Recall 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Automatic Designated Line Access 419 1 wexr NEXT or PREV 5 1 ee To continue 4 4 9 es 3 Enable Disable To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Automatic Line Access 121 CPC Signal Detection Incoming 1 1 1 NEXT or PREV 5 1 4 To continue 4 2 0 2 3 MES 75 To continue SELECT Note CPC signal detect time selection number 00 Disable 01 75 22 614 ms detect time 8 ms increments Feature amp Programming References 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CPC Signal TP PESE oa EE pat oP To continue gaa a irons e3 X Enable Disable To continue Note When this programme is disabled CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside CO line call Feature Guide 241 3 3 PT Programming 242 Feature amp Programming References 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Disconnect Time 422 NEXT or PREV pe Eccc cL CCS To continue QOS EN e n ne no 3
33. Once Data Line Security is set on an extension communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override Extensions that have devices such as modems fax machines or Voice Processing Systems VPSs connected to them may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication User Manual References 1 7 6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security 84 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 6 Flash Recall Description A proprietary telephone PT user can use the FLASH RECALL button to disconnect the current call and start another call without hanging up For example if this button is used to disconnect an outside CO line the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside CO line Conditions e FLASH RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected through system programming Flash Recall Key Mode 110 a MODE 1 EFA mode 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration Flash Recall Time 418 b MODE 2 Flash Recall mode A flash recall signal is sent when the FLASH RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration Flash Recall Time 418 If the length of time that the button is pressed is shor
34. 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 Power Failure Restart Description When the electricity is turned back on the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data Conditions nthe event of a power failure PBX memory is protected by a factory installed lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Call Park 1 12 2 Call Park and Redial 1 6 1 4 Redial Feature Guide 197 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 198 Feature Guide Section 3 Programming Instructions Feature Guide 199 3 1 Introduction 3 1 Introduction 3 1 1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your needs These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide function and changing these settings is referred to as system programming System programming can be performed by only one person at a time A second person attempting to programme the system will be denied access to system programming Ways to Programme There are 2 programming methods PC Programming PC programming is described in Section 3 2 PC Programming PT Proprietary Telephone Programming PT programming is described in Sec
35. 1250 ms 3500 ms For Others 0 ms 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 207 DOD ww Gee em me MODE1 50 180 ms 80 180 ms MODES3 80 650 ms MODE4 80 1000 ms MODES 200 1000 ms Feature amp Programming References 1 12 1 Call Hold Inter digit Time 208 DOA ex Gu em we 5 10 15 20 s Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS No Dial Disconnection 21 1 DTMF Time 210 2 J lo Low MODE1 80 ms 160 ms Feature Guide 227 3 3 PT Programming Note This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside CO lines that have been set to DTMF in Dial Mode 401 Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection No Dial Disconnection 211 21112 esr Le Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Inter digit Time 208 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 2 2 1 32 min Note This programme is available for the extension s enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation 613 Feature amp Programming References 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation Bell off Detection 213 2 4 3 Gee erore 8 6 12 s Note This programme selects the minimum time r
36. 801 sese 229 TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 sse nene 229 TRS Exception Code 306 entente tenth terns sten ennt ette nennen 230 Emergency Number 909 5 lotte ere RE een rere opea Lees ra ek pner es Era RERBA 230 Account Code SIO Em 230 Automatic Pause Insertion Code 31 1 ssesssssssesseeeeeene enne ener nnne 231 TRS Extension Lock Class 312 231 ARS Selection 850 ice ie dele ean eel tl elect 231 Route 1 4 Selection Code 851 354 oo eeeeecseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeseaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeseneeseesneeeseeseaeeeeeeseaeseeeseeeess 231 Route 1 4 Exception Code 955 358 nini nivel indienne 232 1st Carrier Selection Code 859 oo eee eeceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaaeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeseaeesaeseaeeseeseaeseneeseaeseeeseatens 232 ARS Modification Removed Digits 360 232 ARS Modification Added Number 361 sesessessessseeeeeeneennen nennen nnne nennen enne nennen 233 ARS Dial Tone S62 sii EE 233 ARS Intet digit Time 363 MM 233 ARS CO Line Group 864 233 Route 1 4 Authorisation Code 881 3841 2
37. Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 Secret Printing 924 Budget Management 925 Budget Limit Selection 926 Changed Contents 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation 1 18 4 Display Information 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 20 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 286 Feature Guide 4 3 Revision History 1 20 1 2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 2 2 4 Operator Manager Features 2 3 2 PT Programming 3 3 1 Programming Instructions 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 287 4 3 Revision History 288 Feature Guide Index Feature Guide 289 Index Numerics 1st Carrier Selection Code 359 232 2 way Recording into the VPS 147 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 253 3 level Automated Attendant AA 107 3 party Conference 99 5 party Conference 99 A Absent Message 131 Account Code 310 230 Account Code Entry 43 Account Code Mode 605 255 Administrative Information Features 152 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 39 Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 39 Answering Features 35 Answering Features OVERVIEW 35 Appendix 277 ARS Line Group 364 233 ARS Dial Tone 362 233 ARS Inter digit Time 363 233 ARS Modification Added Number 361 233 ARS Modification Removed Digits 360 232 ARS Selection 350 231 ARS gt Automatic Route Selection ARS 74 Audible Tone Features 169 Authorisation and Itemised Billing
38. DSS buttons and Programmable Feature PF buttons on the DSS Console f Speed dial The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number 001 and System Speed Dialling Name 01 1 g Stop output Not shown Conditions SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted It is cleared when output via RS 232C to a PC printer etc or by performing System Data Clear Multilingual Display by SMDR It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming SMDR Language 806 The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time Call Duration Counter Start 204 after the end of seizing an outside CO line or dialling before starting the call duration counter for outgoing outside CO line calls When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call A display proprietary telephone PT shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside CO line Polarity Reverse Detection 424 the PBX will start the call duration counter immediately after the outside party answers the call For SMS users When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR because it takes very
39. DTMF EFA FWD G CO IRNA LCS LED O CO OGM PF PSTN PT S CO SLT SMDR SMS TAM TRS UCD VM VPS Feature Guide Automated Attendant Analogue Proprietary Telephone Automatic Route Selection Background Music Busy Station Signalling Built in Voice Message Class of Service Calling Party Control Direct In Line Direct Inward System Access Do Not Disturb Distinctive Ring Detection Direct Station Selection Dual Tone Multi Frequency External Feature Access Call Forwarding Group CO Intercept Routing No Answer Live Call Screening Light Emitting Diode Other CO Outgoing Message Programmable Feature Public Switched Telephone Network Proprietary Telephone Single CO Single Line Telephone Station Message Detail Recording Short Message Service Telephone Answering Machine Toll Restriction Uniform Call Distribution Voice Mail Voice Processing System Feature Highlights Built in Voice Message BV Optional voice message card required Built in Voice Message BV allows a caller to leave a voice message in a user s personal message area or the PBX s common message area 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support Optional Caller ID card required The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service SMS centre to specific single line telephones SLTs that support SMS Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Tel
40. Did the UCD Busy Goes to Waiting Time expire Goes to 5 Intercept Normal Disconnect m is available Is Intercept Routing employed Yes No Y The call is directed to another extension The call is disconnected What is the UCD Busy Mode UCD Ring Time after Disconnect OGM Intercept DISA Intercept expires y y_ The call is The call is not UCD OGM is sent established answered to the caller Y Goes to The call is The call is A DISA OGM is sent The call is disconnected disconnected to the caller disconnected Y Goes to DISA UCD Busy Mode When all extensions in a UCD group are busy call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time UCD Busy Waiting Time 521 If this timer expires the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming UCD Busy Mode 523 a Disconnect The call is disconnected immediately b Disconnect OGM The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message OGM plays e g We are still handling other calls Please call back later C Intercept Normal The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 d Intercept DISA The call is directed to the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA and the caller hears a DISA OGM e g Tha
41. Display Information 142 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD 426 New Zealand only 243 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand 20 DND Override 34 DND Override 609 256 DNDTone 282 DND gt Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 30 Do Not Disturb DND 34 DoorOpen 103 Door Open Duration 709 265 Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 263 Doorbell Door Chime 104 Doorphone Access Tone 707 264 Doorphone Call 102 Doorphone Chime Assignment 711 265 Doorphone Chime Pattern 712 266 Doorphone Chime Patterns 285 Doorphone Ring Time 708 264 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 264 Doorphone Ring Chime 710 265 Doorphone Ringing Day Night Lunch 700 702 263 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone 433 434 New Zealand only 245 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 427 429 New Zealand only 244 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand only 244 DRD gt Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand 20 DSS Console Jack Assignment 003 209 DSS Lamp Mode 112 216 DSS Off hook Mode 126 219 DTMF Integration 103 214 DTMF Integration Port 102 214 DTMF Receiver Check 107 215 DTMF Time 210 227 Feature Guide 291 Index E EFA External Feature Access EFA 86 Electronic Station Lockout gt Extension Lock 72 Emergency Call 42 Emergency Number 309 230 Entering Characters 204 Entering Manager Programming
42. Feature Guide 237 3 3 PT Programming Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 To continue Go to next or prev jack number 0 0 ces emm n Meas 08 10 u 1 3 X 01 08 X Enable 08 for day Disable 09 for night To continue 10 for lunch Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 2 Outside CO Line Ringing Selection 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 411 413 To continue Go to next or prev jack number arr Cee A I ron Ho 11 613 11 1 3 01 08 X Refer to the note 11 for day 12 for night To continue 13 for lunch Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number Note The ringing start time that can be selected for extension s selected in Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 depends on your country area as follows For United Kingdom Immediately 10 s 20 s 30 s For Others Immediately 5 s 10 s 15 s 238 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 2 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 lt To select Normal UCD and or MODEM gt NEXT NEXT or PREV prev 9 34 curse Inge coe To continue OW e 3 Normal UCD i a a MODEM To continue 15 for night 16 for
43. Flat Charge b If the Call Duration is more than the Flat Duration Call Duration Flat Duration Call Charge Flat Charge Unit Charge Unit Charge x Whole Number Part of Unit Duration Programming Example Using the example shown in 3 Call Charge Table If the dialled number is and the call is made at Peak time a Ifthe Call Duration is 160 s Call Charge 100 ES Flat Charge b Ifthe Call Duration is 250 s Call Charge 100 50 50 X 2 250 Flat Charge DN Unit Charge Call Duration Flat Duration 250 180 Unit Duration Unit Charge Call Charge Display Information about the call charge can be shown on the display of a PT The display can contain up to 3 characters e g EUR for Euro for the currency Currency 921 and up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point for each call charge The decimal point position the number of significant decimal digits for the charge can also be programmed Decimal Places 190 Additionally the order in which information is displayed can be programmed LCD Display Mode 630 For more information refer to 1 18 4 Display Information Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension Budget Management 925 For example an extension in a rented office may have a prepaid limit for telephone usage If the total of call charges reaches the limit t
44. H nting Type iii et epic ere DOC HORE REC 213 DIMF Integration Port 102 2 2 edet eto tenete eine rodent eoe tenete ne teet ner stetit tire ioc Rei eee eher 214 DTMF Integratiori 109 iiid oder tnde te p itle cer Eee ees 214 SLT MY00 CA KON A nennen nenennnen nne 214 Conference Tone 105 214 External Pager Access Tone 1061 4 nnne nennen 215 DTMF Receiver Check 1071 0 444 0 11 00 000000000 eene nennen enne nsn nns ttn t tenen 215 Flash Recall Mode for a Locked Extension 1081 215 GO Indicator 109 MES 215 Flash Recall Key Mode 215 Music om Hold 1 tac es aside sac 216 DSS Lamp Mode 11 2 HE AS 216 Automatic Redial Repeat Count 216 Automatic Redial Interval 1 216 Extension Ring Tone Pattern 15 217 Conference Pattern 116 ioter tied ete ice Ma REG RIPE REEL EE HERE RAS EcL D He RT IO dU ee Pe Fun 217 Call Pick p Tone 1V1 7 EET 217 Pulse Restriction 118 217 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Co
45. Hold 3 Feature amp Programming References 1 12 1 Call Hold Conference Tone 105 DOG Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override 1 13 1 2 Conference 214 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming External Pager Access Tone 106 EL co te we ierons ies Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 14 1 Paging DTMF Receiver Check 1 ee ia a cere rs p continue 1 0 7 DTMF receiver SELECT STORE 2 Enable Disable Note This programme enables each DTMF receiver 1 2 checking extension jacks 01 08 to check whether it is operating normally or not Installation Manual References 4 1 3 Operation Flash Recall Mode for a Locked Extension 108 DOA Cex em Enable Disable D ot This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash recall signal during a conversation with an outside party CO Indicator 109 1 0 9 Ge Gee rose Enable Disable Note This programme is available for the extension s assigned not to ring in Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 to answer incoming outside CO line calls Flash Recall Key Mode 110 290210 Been stone e J MODE1 EFA mode MODE Flash Recall mode Feature Guide 215 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References
46. If the dialled extension or outside CO line is busy when a call is made the caller can choose to be informed by a callback ring Camp on Recall when the extension or outside CO line becomes free When the user answers the callback ring For an intercom call The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial For an outside CO line call The line is seized Conditions If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds 4 rings the callback is cancelled More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside CO line at the same time User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 62 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Description An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3 party conference call Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user Conditions System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override 608 This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security When a 2 party conversation is changed to a 3 party conference call a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties 1
47. Refer to the note To continue Notes disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country area as follows For United Kingdom 0 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s For South Africa 0 8 s 1 5 s 4 0 s For Others 0 5 s 1 5 s 4 05 Thetime you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX Feature amp Programming References 1 10 6 Flash Recall CO Line Ring Tone Pattern LT 285 Sam 5 3 X Single Double Triple continue a Note It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Polarity Reverse Detection em nume von EE 3 Enable Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 5 Reverse Circuit Collect Call Block 425 m sow ss e9 X Enable Disable continue Note This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company Distinctive Ring Detection E New Zealand only i NExT or PREV lt _ eee a pian To continue DOO REM e es e9 X Enable Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 1
48. System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS e System Speed Dialling numbers System Speed Dialling Number 001 and names System Speed Dialling Name 011 can be assigned through system programming The assigned name will be shown on the display of a proprietary telephone PT when an extension user makes calls using this feature Caller s Name If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned name the assigned name will be shown on the display 1 16 1 Caller ID e System Speed Dialling One touch Dialling and manual dialling can be used in combination User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 3 3 2 System Programming Feature Guide 59 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Description Using Quick Dialling an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily This is possible by storing the number up to 10 digits such as extension number telephone number or feature number for Quick Dialling through system programming Second Feature Numbering Plan 012 Programming Example Quick Dialling Code No Desired Number 50 34 51 43 Cont 59 912345678 In this example The feature number for Paging External 34 is stored with the code number 50 Users can make paging announcements by going off hook and then dialling 5
49. The outside CO line hunting sequence from highest numbered outside CO line or in rotation for Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access 122 e System programming determines the extension users that can make outside CO line calls in each time service mode Flexible Outward Dialling Day Night Lunch 405 407 e possible to specify which outside CO lines are connected to the PBX CO Line Connection 400 This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside CO lines that are not connected Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 53 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features Memory Dialling Features Memory Dialling Features OVERVIEW Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX A stored number can be dialled by a simple operation 1 54 Features Feature Storage Method Details in One touch Dialling Personal Programming 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling KX T7710 One touch Dialling System Programming 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Redial Last Number The last or most recently dialled number is 1 6 1 4 Redial automatically stored Saved While in a conversation with an outside party or Number while hearing a busy
50. a In day mode Direct In Line DIL distribution is assigned The call is routed to its DIL destination extension 101 b Inlunch night mode DIL distribution is assigned The call is routed to its DIL destination extension 102 Conditions e Touse this feature DIL must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port When Normal is selected an incoming outside CO line call is received at the extensions assigned in Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 This outside CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls but can only be used by a single extension to receive calls Ifa DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension Hunting feature and it is busy the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Time Service 14 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing Description Redirects incoming outside CO line calls via the Direct Inward System Access DISA or Uniform Call Distribution UCD feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not or cannot answer the call There are 2 types of Intercept Routing described below Type Description No Dial While or after hearing a DISA outgoing message OGM or after hearing a dial tone short beep if the caller does not dial anything or ente
51. j Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Calculation Time Table 1 2 3 4 162 169 176 183 aaa 0 8 80 62 69 76 83 62 Table 1 69 Table2 76 Table 3 83 Table 4 NEXT or PREV go to another day of the week meja 0 O e me Ge 1 12 Every Peak Off Peak iun NN To go to another hour SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 163 170 177 184 J m 3 ERE DUET To continue JAA Cer ED 9 Ez es e 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s exc decimal point tea continue 70 Table 2 ee 77 Table 3 84 Table 4 Feature Guide 223 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 164 171 178 185 WRJ 2 eoe oe store ew 64 71 78 85 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s exc decimal point 64 Table 1 0 9 a 71 Table 2 Um 78 Table 3 85 Table 4 evecr lt To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 0Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration 165 172 179 186 To continue WIK ES location no flat charge D eoe oe
52. or Prev or PREV lt To continue OOo n 08 X a Disable To continue SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV 260 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming BV Access Code through CO Line 625 Eis cci iki To continue voice message access code STORE 4 10 digits 0 9 To continue Avoice message access code should be different from the corresponding extension number If the voice message access code is the same as an extension number dialling that number will access the extension not the voice message area A code that starts with a number already assigned as another code cannot be used For example if you assign the codes 1234 and 12345 12345 cannot be selected since 1234 will be recognised first Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV BGM Control for APT 626 NEXT NEXT PREV PREV To continue 6 2 6 vex sues so 08 E Disable To ies Feature amp Programming References 1 15 4 Background Music BGM SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call 627 NEXT NEXT PREV PREV lt To continue 2 08 S To continue SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Feature Guide 261 3
53. the proprietary telephone PT user can press the O CO button Conditions e PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time Dialling Start Time 206 after seizing an outside CO line before dialling Button Assignment A flexible CO button can be customised as an S CO G CO or O CO button as follows 52 Type Assignable parameter Single CO S CO A specified outside CO line is assigned Default CO 1 CO 3 Group CO G CO An outside CO line group is assigned CO Line Group Number 404 Other CO O CO Outside CO lines that are not assigned to S CO or G CO buttons are assigned The same outside CO line group can be assigned to more than one G CO button on the same PT The same outside CO line can be assigned to an S CO button and a G CO button Dialling the Outside CO Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority S CO gt G CO 5 O CO Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside CO Line Access button it indicates line status with a variety of light patterns 1 18 3 LED Indication Direct Outside CO Line Access If a PT user is on hook when pressing an idle CO button the PT automatically enables hands free Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features operation mode The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE or MONITOR button Outside CO Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access
54. tone Conditions DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through system programming DND Override 609 e This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall Camp on Recall and Timed Reminder e Calls from outside CO lines programmed as Normal or DIL CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 can be received at a user s extension but the telephone will not ring The corresponding CO button will flash when an outside CO line call is received and the user can answer the call by pressing this button User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 34 Feature Guide 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 Description Answering Features 1 4 Answering Features Answering Features Answering Features OVERVIEW An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods telephone PT Called Mu e Extension Feature Description Details in A user s own Line Preference A user can select the method to answer 1 4 1 2 Line extension Incoming incoming calls Preference proprietary Incoming Direct One touch A user can answer an incoming call simply Answering by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM button Hands free A user can answer calls automatically and 1 4 1 4 Hands Answerback establish a hands free conversation free An
55. 008 The operator is the destination of Operator Call The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot as follows Password Set password This password is used for the Walking COS feature and the Remote Extension Lock feature Each extension s password should be unique Feature Description Manager Details in Password Manager System Speed Sets the System Speed Required 1 6 1 5 Speed Programming Dialling Number Dialling number Dialling 001 Personal System System Speed Sets the System Speed Required 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Name Dialling name Dialling 011 Personal System DISA Security Sets the DISA security Required 1 15 6 Direct Code 512 code Inward System Access DISA DISA Security Sets the number of digits for Required 1 15 6 Direct Code Digits the DISA security code Inward System 530 Access DISA Call Log Printout Prints and clears call logs Required 1 20 1 2 Call for Each for each extension Log Printout for Extension Each Extension Call Charge Sets displays clears and Required 1 20 2 Call Management prints the call charge data Charge Calculation Extension Sets the extension Required Remote Extension Lock Sets or cancels Extension Lock on an extension remotely Not required 1 8 4 Extension Lock
56. 2 way Recording into the VPS PT users can record their own telephone conversations These recordings can be stored in the PT user s own mailbox 2 way Record or in another user s mailbox 2 way Transfer depending on which button the user presses to begin recording 2 way Record 2 way Transfer Button A flexible CO DSS button can be customised as a 2 way Record or 2 way Transfer button Note You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record any telephone conversation Conditions General A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features FWD AII Calls FWD Busy No Answer DISA Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA For these features the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the IRNA feature from a DISA ring group the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest numbered jack Live Call Screening LCS Topreventthe unauthorised screening of calls a 3 digit password must be entered when activating LCS for an extension If the user forgets his or her password it can be cleared by the operator or manager LCS Password Control Feature Guide 147 1 19 Voice Mail Features If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off hoo
57. 258 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming extension name can be entered using a dialling buttons The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed It is possible to toggle between Alphabet mode Cyrillic alohabet mode and Numeral mode by pressing SELECT Russian display is only available for the KX T7730 KX T7735RU Feature amp Programming References 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Entering Characters LCD Language 615 Message Waiting for Another Extension 8 puc ELEME To continue 6 1 8 Ger sme 08 Disable To continue 1 Feature amp Programming References 1 17 1 Message Waiting SLT Message Waiting 61 ns To continue 6 1 e sue sone Cm 08 Z5 5 continue Feature amp Programming References 1 17 1 Message Waiting Feature Guide 259 3 3 PT Programming LCS Recording Mode Set 6 2 9 sue 08 Keep recording To continue g Feature amp Programming References 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration BV Resource 621 NEXT or PREV 7 m ucc To continue Gy cer susc Sone we 08 NES 1 2 To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV BV for Extension 622
58. 275 Country Setting 194 CPC Signal Detection Incoming 420 241 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing 421 241 CPC gt Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 89 Currency 921 272 Cyclic Tone Detection 513 249 D Data Line Security 84 Date amp Time 000 207 Decimal Places 190 225 Delayed Ringing 28 Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 411 413 238 Denied Code Tables 65 Dial Mode 4011 236 DialTone 169 Dial Type Selection 44 Dialling Start Time 206 227 DIL gt Direct In Line DIL 14 Direct In Line DIL 14 Direct Inward System Access DISA 108 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring 28 Direct Message feature 119 Direct One touch Answering 35 Direct Outside CO Line Access 52 Directed Call Pickup 37 DISA AA Service 108 DISA Wait Time 517 250 DISA Built in AA 501 246 DISA Busy Mode 506 247 DISA Delayed Answer Time 504 247 DISA Incoming Assignment 516 250 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 246 DISA Intercept Mode 507 247 DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 245 DISA No Dial Mode 510 248 DISA Ring Time after Intercept 509 248 DISA Ring Time before Intercept 508 248 DISA Ringback Tone 531 253 DISA Security Code 512 249 DISA Security Code Digits 530 252 DISA Security Mode 511 248 DISA Tone after Security Code 518 250 DISA Wait Time after OGM 505 247 DISA gt Direct Inward System Access DISA 28 108 Disconnect Time 422 242
59. 3 4 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 427 429 New Zealand only DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand only Feature Guide 243 3 3 PT Programming DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 427 429 New Zealand only To continue Go to next or prev jack number ncs stone a Bc Next a stone continue Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection DRD 426 New Zealand only Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 4 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand only To continue Go to next or prev jack number Ga x Pen EN EEE p e 3 30 32 3 01 08 X eee 5 continue 30 for day Go to another jack number 31 for night 32 for lunch To continue Go to another line number 244 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection DRD 426 New Zealand only Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 4 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Tone i New Zealand only Tose Gesh
60. 3 PT Programming SLT Caller ID 628 continue 8 2 8 rone 08 X Enable Disable To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID SLT Fixed Bell Pattern 629 or PREV or PREV n a pa To continue 6 2 8 ses rome e 08 X 2 Single Double To continue 1 Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1 16 1 Caller ID LCD Display Mode 630 NExT NEXT or PREV PREV lt Mr cS sci To continue e 3 0 ied Eu or 08 Duration To continue crm Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation 262 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Doorphone se To continue Go to next or prev jack idi DOE ANNES Gee oon 00 02 2 08 Enable e for day Disable 01 for night To continue 02 for lunch Go to another jack number To continue Go to another doorphone number Feature amp Programming References 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 To continue Go to next or prev jack number ERE roe for ER Disable 04 for night To continue 05 for lunch Go to another jack number To continue Go to another door opener number Feature amp Programming References 1 15 2 Door Open Feat
61. 4 Appendix Feature Guide 277 4 1 Capacity of System Resources 4 1 Capacity of System Resources 4 1 1 Capacity of System Resources Category Item KX TEA308 System Outside CO Line Group 3 Extension Group 8 Absent Message 6 x 16 characters Message Waiting 8 extn Number of Characters of Name 10 Extension Number Digits 20r3 Call Park Zone 10 Conference 5 party 1 Account Code 4 digits 50 entries Host PBX Access Code 1 or 2 digits 8 entries ae Detail Recording 64 calls Call Log Printout for Each Extension 500 calls Intercom Call 3 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA 32 resources PBX 8 UCD resources for Direct Inward System Access DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD 24 resources for 3 level Automated Attendant AA Dialling Emergency Call 24 digits 5 entries Quick Dialling 10 digits 10 entries System Speed Dialling 32 digits 100 entries Personal Speed Dialling 24 digits 10 entries extn One touch Dialling 24 digits Hot Line 32 digits Redial 64 digits Automatic Route Selection Leading Number Table 7 digits 80 entries ABS Leading Number Exception Table 7 digits 80 entries ARS Carrier 4 278 Feature Guide 4 1 Capacity of System Resources Category Item KX TEA308 Toll Restriction TRS Class of Service COS 5 Denied Code Table 11 digits 80 entries Exception Code Table 11 digits 80 entries Cal
62. 922 273 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 273 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Flat Charge and Duration 167 174 181 188 225 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Unit Charge and Duration 168 175 182 189 225 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 165 172 179 186 224 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 166 173 180 187 224 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 163 170 177 184 223 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 164 171 178 185 224 Call Charge Table Assignment 442 246 Call Duration Counter Start 204 226 Call Forwarding FWD 31 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 30 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 30 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND OVERVIEW 30 Call Forwarding Selection 963 274 Call Forwarding Start Time 202 226 Call Forwarding to CO Line 607 255 Call Handling Features 13 CallHold 92 Call Log Next Page 927 274 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 159 CallPark 94 Call Park Recall 94 Call Pickup 37 Call Pickup Deny 37 Call Pickup Tone 117 217 Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine TAM 37 Call Splitting 95 Call Transfer 90 Call Transfer to CO Line 606 255 Call Transfer with Announcement 90 Call Transfer without Announcement 90 Call Transfer Screened gt Call Transfer with Announcement 90 Call Transfer Unscreen
63. Been e J MODE1 66 WODE2 60 Note This programme selects the pulse break ratio the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length of the pause when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number 218 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming TRS Check for and 125 deer ferons Se Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS DSS Off hook Mode 126 2 e nem e J Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call Pickup Group 127 continue gog Ce se eoe Disable To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup CO Indicator 109 Ringback Tone Pattern 128 DAA Cex Gee em me Single 3 s Single 5 s Double 3 s Double 5 s Note This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside CO line calls including a DISA call Feature amp Programming References 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 219 3 3 PT Programming 220 VM 1 APT Port 130 BEES Port03 Port03 amp 04 Disable Notes Tochange the current setting other than Disable select Disable then select the desired setting This programme is not available when Enable i
64. Calculation Feature Guide 225 3 3 PT Programming 226 Hold Recall Time 200 BGO 30 5 1 1 je min Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 12 1 Call Hold 1 12 2 Call Park Transfer Recall Time 201 2 9 1 fuer crore 15 30 s as min Feature amp Programming References 1 11 1 Call Transfer Call Forwarding Start Time 202 2 10 12 uer atone 5 10 15 S delay Feature amp Programming References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Hot Line Waiting Time 203 2 0 8 Ger crore 0 4 s Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Call Duration Counter Start 204 2 9 2 pues atone 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 452 s after dialling Instantly Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 5 Reverse Circuit 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Polarity Reverse Detection 424 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 2 0 5 1 32 min Feature amp Programming References 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation Dialling Start Time 206 2 06 wer eem 80 Refer to the note Note The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside CO line before dialling that can be selected depends on your country area as follows For Czech Republic 0 ms 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
65. Call number 0 or 9 With AA Available destinations are numbers available in Without AA mode and numbers 0 through 9 assigned in DISA Built in AA 501 Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Built in AA 501 1 4 6 2 NEXT or PREV 1 extension jackno or STORE z m E o m m O 0 9 Jack GRP 3 level AA group no Not Stored 1 8 Note If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number 9 0 for New Zealand 1 or 9 and or Operator Call number in AA mode do not assign AA number s that correspond to Automatic Line Access or Operator Call numbers 9 and or 0 Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming FAX Connection 503 8 0 3 vec Ge 08 Disable Notes e To delete disable an extension jack number press CLEAR in the extension jack number step assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Delayed Answer Time 504 BGG Btls qp 0 3 6 12 s Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Wait Time after OGM 505 5 0 15 dee ae 0 5 10 15 s Feature amp Programming Refe
66. Common Area feature number Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received regardless of which call log the information is stored in For example information on the first call received will be stored as record 001 e g 001 logged in the personal area and information on the second call received will be stored as record 002 e g 002 logged in the common area whether it is logged in the personal area common area or BV If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call e g 110 logged in the personal area has been set to overwrite the oldest call 001 logged in the personal area The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down if the 21st call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is if the 21st call is answered and has the same information as the 20th call Common area call logs function in the same way If a transferred call unscreened is not answered the information is logged in the personal area of the final destination Regardless of the telephone type being used the recorded voice message is associated with the caller s information Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication Personal button or a Caller ID Indication Common button a caller can
67. Date amp Time 000 Time Service Start Time 007 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 21 2 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 211 3 3 PT Programming 212 System Speed Dialling Name 011 1 wexr NEXT or PREV pae eee To continue DOO emm aE rore e 16 characters continue 1j Note A name can be entered using a PT s dialling buttons The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed It is possible to toggle between Alphabet mode and Numeral mode by pressing SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Entering Characters Second Feature Numbering Plan m To continue WWB ber m ca 50 59 Max 10 digits 0 9 X P F To continue Note This programme is available only when Plan 2 or Plan 3 is selected in Extension Number 009 Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling 2 3 4 Feature Numbering Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming KX T7710 One touch Dialling 013 i NEXT PREV je e 1 To continue 0 1 3 soe Max 24 digits 0 9 x P F To continue Notes Any feature number can be stored in a One touch button However the feature numbers for Personal S
68. Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number 001 and System Speed Dialling Name 01 1 Installation Manual References 2 10 1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Operator Manager Features 3 8 PT Programming User Manual References 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges 3 3 Customising Your PBX System Programming 186 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 3 Automatic Time Adjustment Description The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your telephone company Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes time information is received The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3 05 A M if enabled through system programming Automatic Time Adjustment 152 Note Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date a timed reminder set within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date a timed reminder set within one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times Conditions will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the end of Summer Time 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Feature Gu
69. EFA External Feature Access G GRP Group IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer L LCS Call Screening OGM Outgoing Message P PT Proprietary Telephone S SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMS Short Message Service T TAM Telephone Answering Machine TRS gt Toll Restriction U UCD Uniform Call Distribution V VM Voice Mail 206 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 2 Programming Procedures means default value throughout these programming instructions X means to select All except when setting the charge in Call Charge Calculation related programming items where it means Decimal point The following are displayed when you store a number such as a telephone number or feature number P PAUSE CONF F FLASH RECALL INTERCOM x PAUSE substitutes for any number i e wild card To return to the previous programming item press 4 correct a wrong entry press CLEAR and then enter the new input e To delete a stored parameter press CLEAR enter the new input and then press STORE Press 9 or BP to scroll the display Some programming items cannot have a value left empty Date amp Time 000 Voo 9 5 gt Jan Dec ie 9 55 es ee Sun Sat 00 59 Notes clock starts immediately after the STORE button is p
70. Jack Configuration Description Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones PTs single line telephones SLTs Direct Station Selection DSS Consoles and Voice Processing Systems VPSs to the PBX Conditions e PT and SLT in Parallel Mode A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode 055 Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system programming DSS Console Jack Assignment 003 Console Paired Telephone 004 Each extension jack number should be unique Automatic Detection A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required 172 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Description Each extension is assigned a class of service COS number TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 The following features operate differently depending on an extension s COS a TRS 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS b Walking COS 1 8 5 Walking COS Conditions e Walking COS An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS temporarily User Manual References 1 2 6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Walking COS Feature Guide 173 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 2 Group 174 Description T
71. Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1 5 5 Using Voice Messaging Built in Voice Message BV 1 8 8 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features 1 17 2 Absent Message Description Extension users can prepare a brief text message Absent Message that will be displayed to other extension users when they are called This message can explain the reason for their absence and can be used by any extension user The following Absent Messages may be programmed Message No Message 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext Extension Number 4 Back at Hour Minute AM or PM 5 Out Until Month Day 6 In a Meeting Notes The date order varies depending on the user s country area The shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension Conditions Anextension user can select only one Absent Message at a time The selected message is displayed at the extension every time the user goes off hook The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone PT to see the Absent Message User Manual References 1 5 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message Feature Guide 131 1 17 Message Features 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support 132 Description When outside CO line calls are received from a Sh
72. Not Stored Not Stored CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features 2 _ gt DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 Note This feature functions only when DISA is selected as the distribution method for the corresponding outside CO line port 3 BVxx 01 24 Common BV OGM number followed by the Common BV OGM feature number 722 In this example If an outside CO line call is received on outside CO line 1 Inday mode The common BV OGM to be played BV01 for BV distribution is assigned The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area b In night lunch mode The common BV OGM to be played BV02 for BV distribution is assigned The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area If an outside CO line call is received on outside CO line 2 In day mode DISA OGM to be played DISA OGMS for DISA distribution and the common BV OGM to be played BV20 for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM When the destination does not answer the DISA call the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area b In night mode The DISA OGM to be
73. Ringing Day Night Lunch 411 413 Outside CO Line Call Normal PBX Extension Immediately e g Operator VPS 1 10 s delay AAT 15 s delay gt 2 3 Status Notification to the VPS When a call is redirected to the VPS the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS This allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call playing the appropriate OGM for the caller For example if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb DND mode the OGM e g I am unable to answer your call right now but I will get back to you shortly can be played Feature Guide 145 1 19 Voice Mail Features 146 VM Service 1 Accessing a Mailbox The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed Follow on ID FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD When a call is received at the extension the PBX sends the extension s mailbox number to the VPS and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM e g Hi I m out of the office today Outside CO Line Call DIL DISA Intercom Call by Extension Operator etc VPS FWD Extension Port 1 gt Port 2 VM Hunting Chain Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS Outside CO line calls via DISA 1 1
74. a fax CNG tone within a preprogrammed time period DISA Wait Time after OGM 505 or if the PBX does not receive DTMF signals within a preprogrammed time period Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 the call will be handled in one of the following ways according to system programming DISA No Dial Mode 510 a Disconnect The call is disconnected b Intercept The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 DISA Security Mode Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA When the DISA security mode is set to All Security or Trunk Security DISA Security Mode 511 a caller is required to enter a DISA security code DISA Security Code 512 before making intercom and outside CO line calls or outside CO line calls only respectively The DISA security code and the number of digits required for the DISA security code DISA Security Code Digits 530 can be assigned by the manager After entering a DISA security code if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security codes the caller will hear a short beep It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming DISA Tone after Security Code 518 If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA a reorder tone w
75. after which it reverts to the called party s previous setting The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system programming Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside CO line calls can also be selected through system programming gt Ringback Tone Pattern 128 Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number a user will hear one of the following Type Description Ringback Tone Indicates the call is being received at the called party s extension Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice calling Busy Tone Indicates the called party s extension is busy DND Tone Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 39 1 5 Making Call Features User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 2 5 Switching the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 40 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 Outside CO Line Call Features 1 5 2 1 Description Outside CO Line Call Features OVERVIEW An extension user can use the following features when making an outside CO line call Feature Description Details in Emergency Call A user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers rega
76. all intercom calls and certain outside CO line calls to an outside party Call Forwarding to CO Line 607 These outside CO line calls must arrive on outside CO lines whose programming CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 is one of the following a DIL 32 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features b DISA only when the call is directly sent to an extension not intercepted C UCD when only one member belongs to the group Outside CO Line Call Duration If a call between 2 outside parties is established the call duration will be restricted by a system timer CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires When the timer expires the call is disconnected 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation CPC Calling Party Control signal or reverse signal is received from an outside CO line the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected User Manual References 1 5 1 Forwarding Your Calls Call Forwarding FWD 1 5 5 Using Voice Messaging Built in Voice Message BV 1 8 8 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 33 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 3 Not Disturb DND Description Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension The calling extension will hear a Do Not Disturb DND
77. amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Feature Guide 269 3 3 PT Programming Caller ID Area Code 901 i Next Prev NEXT or PREV 2 To continue 9 0 1 or ib S 5 continue Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Modification for Local Calls 902 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls 902 To continue Select the removed digits ajaja E 1 5 0 9 gt the added om Max 4 digits 0 9 X Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Area Code 901 Caller ID Modification for Long distance Calls 903 lt Select the removed digits gt s 9 Select the added fem ETT STORE store eno Max 4 digits 0 9 x removed digits 0 9 Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log 270 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Caller ID Log Priority 904 Des use creep e To continue 8 e 4 sees 08 X E Numbor To continue suc 31 Note This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number If only the number is provided this programme is not necessary Feature amp Programming References 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log 1 18 4 Display Information Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition
78. an outside CO line The relevant voice message area is accessed by entering a preprogrammed voice message access code BV Access Code through CO Line 625 while hearing a personal common BV OGM or DISA OGM Note If the Voice Mail Integration feature has been set the BV feature will not function Feature Guide 119 1 15 Optional Device Features 120 Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional voice message card The BV feature does not use OGMs for DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD on the preinstalled DISA UCD OGM card 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD When an extension that belongs to BV resource 1 or BV resource 2 is reassigned to the other resource the voice messages that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased but the personal common BV OGMs are not erased Each resource can only be accessed by one extension at a time When the resource an extension is assigned to is being used by another extension the extension cannot use that resource even if the other resource is available The PBX can record a maximum of 125 voice messages per resource The maximum recording time of each voice message BV Recording Time 214 and the total recording time of the PBX BV Total Recording Time 807 are programmable The maximum recording time of each personal common BV OGM Common Personal BV OGM Recording Time 215 is also programmable System programming determines the extension u
79. and data upload download can be performed either through on site programming or remote programming 1 On site Programming Programming that is performed using an on site PC connected directly to the PBX 2 Remote Programming Programming that is performed using an off site PC that connects to the PBX via an outside CO line 1 Connection Methods for On site Programming Required Method Description Hardwara Serial Interface The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface RS RS 232C 232C port of the PBX USB The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of the PBX Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 Connection Methods for Remote Programming Required Method Description Hardware Remote modem Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem User supplied using one of the following methods modem Direct Access Using a modem dial the telephone number to connect to the internal modem To use this feature MODEM must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port C CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 DISA Using a telephone dial the telephone number to reach the DISA line 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA After hearing a DISA outgoing message OGM enter the Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal modem To use this feature DISA must be selected as the distribution meth
80. be selected for each outside CO line Flash Recall Time 418 User Manual References 1 8 2 If a Host PBX is Connected 86 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation Description Outside CO line calls are limited by the following features Feature Description Extension to Outside CO When call between an extension user and an outside party is Line Call Duration established the call duration is restricted by a timer Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5 second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires When the timer expires the call is disconnected System programming determines which extensions have calls limited by this feature CO Line Call Duration Limitation 613 This timer applies to outside CO line calls that are made via the PBX Outside to Outside CO to When a call between 2 outside parties is established the call duration is CO Line Call Duration restricted by a timer CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires When the timer expires the call is disconnected Budget Management When the total of call charges reaches a specified limit an extension user hears an alarm 3 sets of 3 beeps and the user cannot make further outside CO line calls Whether the call is disconnected after the alarm is programmabl
81. can answer the doorphone call by going off hook within a preprogrammed time period Doorphone Ring Time 708 If the user is allowed to unlock the door Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 he or she can then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number Ifthe called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting the extension user hears a call waiting tone and the call information flashes on the display Conditions Hardware Requirement A user supplied doorbell door chime connected to each door opener Installation Manual References 2 7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime Feature Guide References 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones 104 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features User Manual References 1 8 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 105 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 4 Background Music BGM Description A proprietary telephone PT user can listen to background music BGM through the built in speaker while on hook and idle Conditions Hardware requirement A user supplied external audio device such as a CD player or radio for External audio source music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off hook receiving a call or receiving a paging announcement audio can be selected through system programming Music on Hold 111 e This feature can be turned on and off by dialling 1 while the extension is on hook and
82. certain extension users from making unauthorised outside CO line calls Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service COSs for each time service mode TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 COS 1 grants the highest level of authorisation allowing all outside CO line calls to be made and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation COSs 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables explained below Denied Code Tables gt TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted All outgoing outside CO line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied Code Table s and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number not including the Outside CO Line Access number matches an entry found in an applicable table the call is denied Up to a total of 80 denied codes each consisting of up to 11 digits can be stored Exception Code Tables TRS Exception Code 306 Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table When a dialled number is prohibited by a Denied Code Table it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table s If the dialled number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table the call is
83. efficient utilisation of outside CO lines the PBX monitors each line s status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone Conditions Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside CO line calls gt CPC Signal Detection Incoming 420 and for outgoing outside CO line calls gt CPC Signal Detection Outgoing 421 Ifa CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA and an extension or an outside party the call will be disconnected e tis possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside CO line calls for the duration gt CPC Signal Detection Incoming 420 specified through system programming gt Incoming Reverse 153 Feature Guide 89 1 11 Transferring Features 1 11 Transferring Features 1 11 1 Call Transfer Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party The following features are available Feature Transferring method With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination party Without Announcement Transfer is completed without an announcement After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback tone or busy tone the originator can replace the handset Call Transfer
84. in Voice Message BV UCD Group 520 sy 1 8 Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 2 2 2 Group UCD Busy Waiting Time 521 5 2 1 seuer 32 min 1 59 s Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Busy Mode 523 UCD OGM Message Interval Time 522 5 2 2 roe 30 s 1 1 5 2 Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Busy Waiting Time 521 UCD Busy Mode 523 To select Intercept Normal or Disconnect 5 2 3 Beer crore Intercept Normal Disconnect To select Intercept DISA or Disconnect OGM gt DOO MEIN sow Intercept DISA Disconnect OGM Feature Guide 251 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Intercept Mode 524 5 2 4 fuer crore Intercept Disconnect Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Ring Time before Intercept 525 5 2 5 fuer crore 10 20 30 20 5 Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Intercept Mode 524 UCD Ring Time after Intercept 526 5 2 le Beer rone e J 10 20 30 Aveo 20 s Feature amp Progr
85. leave a voice message in that personal common message area and the Caller ID information including associated voice messages will be logged Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log including associated voice messages stored in his or her personal area preventing other users from viewing its contents 1 8 4 Extension Lock The operator or manager can cancel the lock in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code Feature Guide 127 1 16 Caller ID Features 128 Extension Lock CANCEL ALL The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager e Automatic Caller ID Number Modification If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers the modified numbers will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked Extension users can also modify the incoming telephone numbers manually initial Display Selection If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name the user can select which is shown first on the display of the PT through system programming Caller ID Log Priority 904 e While a user is viewing his or her extension s Incoming Call Log if the caller whose information is being viewed also left a voice message the Message Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light will turn on The associated voice messages in that personal common message area can be played or erased with the MESSA
86. line calls CO Line Access 50 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing Description Through personal programming a proprietary telephone PT user can select the preferred method of seizing a line Line Preference Outgoing to be used each time the user goes off hook Method Description Idle Line When a user goes off hook an idle outside CO line is selected automatically from among the assigned outside CO lines Automatic Designated Line Access 419 No Line When a user goes off hook no line is selected In order to make a call the user must select the desired line manually Prime Line When a user goes off hook the preset line is selected automatically Conditions A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside CO Line Access button Single CO S CO Group CO G CO or Other CO O CO before selecting a line preference Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference Line Preference Override A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside CO Line Access button or INTERCOM button before going off hook System programming determines the extension users that can make outside CO line calls in each time service mode Flexible Outward Dialling Day Night Lunch 405 407 It is possible to specify which outside CO lines are connected to the PBX CO Line Connecti
87. little time to send SMS messages To verify the duration of these calls it is recommended to set the start timer of call duration to 5 s or Instantly through system programming Call Duration Counter Start 204 SMDR Format The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming SMDR Parameter 801 in order to match the paper size being used by the printer a Page Length determines the number of lines per page b Skip Perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length The title is placed on the first 3 lines of every page To enable the changes you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing this setting Feature Guide 157 1 20 Administrative Information Features 158 O O Perforation iind o 66 lines OOOOOO O Perforation O Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface RS 232C port through system programming SMDR RS 232C Parameter 800 a New Line NL Code Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LF b Baud Rate Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer C Word Length Word length i
88. lunch SELECT To select BV gt To continue Bl SELECT CoN MOLE ID STORE store eno 3 01 24 M 15 for night 16 for lunch SELECT To select DISA gt we eee ep To continue B B NEXT SELECT SUU lt store eno DISA u To continue 15 for night 16 for lunch SELECT To select DIL gt ape wo ge To continue 1 3 mum 01 en To continue 15 for night 16 for lunch SELECT Feature Guide 239 3 3 PT Programming 240 Notes When you select UCD it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD Group 520 e After you select BV do not change Operator Assignment 008 Feature amp Programming References 1 1 1 1 Direct In Line DIL 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV 2 3 1 PC Programming Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 Pause Time 417 DOTE BEREENN je e en 3 x 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 s S To continue jl Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Automatic Pause Insertion Code 311 Host PBX Access Code 403 Flash Recall Time 418 i next Prev NEXT or PREV 575755712770 ee To continue 000 mm ies e 3 80 100 160 2
89. of 32 messages 8 messages for DISA UCD and 24 messages for 3 level AA After recording messages the operator or manager can also play them back for confirmation In addition the operator or manager can erase messages for DISA UCD When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message he or she will hear an alarm tone if the message channel is in use When a call between 2 outside parties is established or when Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type is being executed the operator or manager cannot record or play back a message Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart To clear them use system programming Clear All OGMs of DISA UCD 599 User Manual References 2 1 7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 107 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 108 Description Direct Inward System Access DISA allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX destinations without the use of the operator Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message OGM instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like to speak with DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features such as making outside CO line calls when they are outside the office This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to e Callan extension by dialling the extension number e anoth
90. on the contract with the telephone company Mode Description DTMF Dual Tone Multi Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside CO Frequency line using tones If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX select this mode as necessary If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies DTMF lines select this mode Pulse Rotary Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside CO line using pulses Call Blocking If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines select this mode When dialling with a touch tone telephone only Pulse signals will be sent to the telephone company Conditions Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside CO lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming System Data Clear 999 No system programming in Dial Mode 401 and Pulse Speed 402 is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside CO lines is Call Blocking If your telephone company can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals the PBX selects an outside CO line type according to the following priority Pulse High Pulse Low Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to tempor
91. originally called extension Message waiting indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD or an idle extension hunting destination 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back and the call is answered Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration If a voice message is left for the called extension it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration Message Waiting Indication via BV If a voice message is left in the user s personal message area or the common message area it can be played back with the lit MESSAGE button by the user or the operator manager respectively 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Itis possible to activate the Message Ringer Lamp KX T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control 968 on the KX T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls ncoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call Waiting Call Waiting Tone 1 ncoming doorphone call whose ring tone pattern is set to S Double Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 except when using the Parallelled Telephone feature when an optional doorphone or doorbell door chime is connected to the PBX Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User
92. single extension An extension can belong to only one extension group Extension Group 600 One hunting type can be programmed for each extension group If all the searched extensions in an idle extension hunting group are busy a busy tone will be heard at the extension that made the intercom call including Direct Inward System Access DISA calls A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group and rejoin the group by logging back 1 2 4 Log in Log out FWD DND Mode When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension that has set FWD DND or Log out will be skipped 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND However if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND Idle Extension Hunting will Feature Guide 23 1 2 Receiving Group Features not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination when FWD is set or will not be received at all when DND is set Message Waiting A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination The MESSAGE button light or Message Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only 1 17 1 Message Waiting Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 24 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Description Uniform Call Distribution UCD distributes incoming call
93. the settings unchanged keep pressing SELECT until None is displayed This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service Switching Mode 006 Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry When the display shows None press SELECT to set the start time Feature amp Programming References 2 2 3 Time Service Operator Assignment pr 2 8 se 08 Disable 210 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Note To delete disable an extension jack number press CLEAR in the extension jack number step Feature amp Programming References 2 2 4 Operator Manager Features Extension Number 009 8 Qr Plan 1 2 3 Prev NEXT or PREV DIT MM To continue To continue SELECT 4 J Programmable extension numbers are as follows Plan 1 100 199 Plan 2 100 499 Plan 3 10 49 for United Kingdom New Zealand Plan 1 200 299 for New Zealand Plan 2 200 499 Plan 3 20 49 The same extension number cannot be entered for 2 different extension jacks Feature amp Programming References 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling 1 19 2 Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration 2 3 4 Feature Numbering LCD Time Display 010 OG 12 24 h Note The following settings and features use 12 hour format even if 24 hour format is assigned in this programme
94. 0 b The feature number for Paging Answer 43 is stored with the code number 51 Users can answer paging announcements by going off hook and then dialling 51 C Atelephone number 912345678 is stored with the code number 59 Users can call this outside number by going off hook and then dialling 59 Conditions This feature is available when Plan 2 or Plan 3 is selected in Extension Number 009 2 3 4 Feature Numbering User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 60 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Description A single line telephone SLT user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number up to 32 digits simply by going off hook If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off hook a special dial tone dial tone 2 is generated for a preprogrammed time period Hot Line Waiting Time 203 and then dialling starts During this waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Hot Line feature This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling Conditions This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs This feature will not function when the extension user goes off hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 61 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Description
95. 00 When calls are received idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type Hunting Type 101 Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting 2 4 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Group A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group UCD Group 520 To use this feature UCD must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port C CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 5 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring Group A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group All extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant AA destination DISA Built in AA 501 ring simultaneously To use this feature DISA must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 and With AA must be selected as the destination of incoming outside CO line calls via the DISA feature DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 2 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 1 14 1 Paging Feature Guide 175 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 3 Time Service Description Time service modes are used by many PBX features to de
96. 04 268 System Password 002 208 System Requirements 201 System Speed Dialling Name 011 212 System Speed Dialling Number 001 207 I TAM Extension 611 257 TAM gt Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine Terminated Hunting 23 Time Service 176 Time Service Start Time 007 210 Time Service Switching Mode 006 210 Timed Reminder 168 Toll Restriction TRS 65 Toll Restriction TRS Features 65 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code 69 Tones Ring Tones 280 Transfer Recall 90 Transfer Recall Time 201 226 Transferring Features 90 TRS Check after Answering 966 275 TRS Check for 125 219 TRS Check Time after Answering 967 275 TRS for System Speed Dialling 66 TRS gt Toll Restriction TRS Features 65 TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 254 TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 229 TRS Exception Code 306 230 TRS Extension Lock Class 68 72 TRS Extension Lock Class 312 231 TRS System Speed Dialling Class 301 229 U UCD Busy Mode 523 251 294 Feature Guide UCD Busy Waiting Time 5211 251 UCD Group 520 251 UCD Intercept Mode 524 252 UCD OGM Message Interval Time 522 251 UCD Ring Time after Intercept 526 252 UCD Ring Time before Intercept 525 252 UCD Waiting Message 527 252 Unattended Conference 99 Unattended Conference Recall 99 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 25 User Manual References 2 V Version2 0 286 VM 1 APT
97. 1 10 6 Flash Recall 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Music on Hold 111 2011 J Internal Event one Note Selections vary depending on your country area Feature amp Programming References 1 12 4 Music on Hold 1 15 4 Background Music BGM DSS Lamp Mode 112 7012 Enable Disable Note Enable FWD Flashing slowly DND Flashing at moderate speed Disable FWD Off DND Off Feature amp Programming References 1 18 3 LED Indication Automatic Redial Repeat Count 113 1 J 3 rone ev J 0 3 10 5 times Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 4 Redial Automatic Redial Interval 114 74 14 J 40 60 s Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 4 Redial 216 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 BEES NIS NETS Single Double Triple Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Conference Pattern 116 13 6 nem rone e J 3 party C 0 E 3 3 party C 1 E 3 3 party C 2 E 3 5 party C 2 E 4 Note 3 party C 0 E 3 No outside parties can attend a 3 party conference call 3 party C 1 E 3 One outside party can attend a 3 party conference call 3 party C 2 E 3 A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3 party conference call
98. 1 17 1 Message Waiting FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND OVERVIEW Save Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone and then easily redial the number later 1 6 1 4 Redial Conference Used to establish a 3 party or 5 party conference call 1 13 1 2 Conference Caller ID Indication Personal Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area store the information of an incoming call during a conversation and view caller information while on hook and then call back a caller 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Function Caller ID Selection Personal Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation while receiving a call or while viewing caller information display the number of logged calls while on hook and inform an extension user that the personal area call log is full 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Indication Common Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area store the information of an incoming call during a conversation and view caller information while on hook and then call back a caller 1 16 2 Incoming Call Lo
99. 13 1 2 Conference It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Conference Tone 105 User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide 63 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 3 Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension i e an extension that is ringing or having a conversation a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting Conditions e This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e One of 2 call waiting tones Tone 1 or Tone 2 can be selected through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection For doorphone calls Tone 1 is used as a call waiting tone not changeable Tone 2 depends on the assignments in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 for outside CO line calls and in Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 for intercom calls Feature Guide References 1 1 3 5 Call Waiting 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 64 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Description Toll Restriction TRS can prohibit
100. 16 0 04 EUR 12 31 05 12 53PM 103 02 lt incoming gt 00 01 43 12 31 05 12 54PM 101 02 lt incoming gt 00 07 48 12 31 05 12 55PM 101B 02 lt BV incoming gt 00 00 43 12 31 05 12 56PM 107B 03 lt DIL incoming gt 00 01 43 ate 12 31 05 1 04PM 103 01 092 1438 00 00 06 0 02 EUR 4536 12 31 05 1 04PM 102 03 DISA incoming 00 00 09 0 12 31 05 1 05PM 103 01 DISA incoming 00 00 08 0 12 31 05 1 06PM 103 01 092123456789 00 00 08 0 02 EUR 12 31 05 1 06PM C 03 02 0921234567 00 00 17 0 04 EUR 2 12 31 05 1 07PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 13 12 31 05 2 15PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 101 12 31 05 2 26PM 103 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 0 15 EUR 101 12 31 05 2 27PM 108 03 920924567123 00 13 55 0 67 EUR 12 31 05 3 25PM 02 lt UCD waiting gt 00 11 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 Feature Guide 153 1 20 Administrative Information Features 154 Explanation The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR The section numbers below refer to the field indicated by the numbers above Section Number Data Description 1 Date Shows the date Month Day Year of the call gt Date amp Time 000 The date order varies depending on the user s country area 2 Time Shows the start time of a call as hour minute AM or PM Also shows the following code Transferred call 1 11 1 Call Transfer 3 Ext Extension Show
101. 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 9 1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log 2 1 4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area Incoming Call Log in the Common Area CLEAR ALL 2 1 5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features 1 17 Message Features 1 17 1 Message Waiting Description When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call he or she can leave a message waiting indication The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user s telephone will light indicating that a call was missed or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System VPS or Built in Voice Message BV feature is waiting A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message When a message is left for a proprietary telephone PT the MESSAGE button on it lights or the Message Ringer Lamp turns red Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on hook shows the caller s information as shown below Example 105 Tom Smith Extension no and name of the person who left the message m fe C3 NIZ NZ Message Message for Another Extension buttons CL This extension CL Other extension This button is useful when for example the manager checks messages left for another extension Conditions System prog
102. 2 3 2 PT Programming Description A proprietary telephone PT can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension using the following programming features 2 3 System Data Control Programming Type Description Example Authorised Programmer Personal Programming Used by an extension user to customise the extension s settings One touch Dialling Line Preference Outgoing etc Extension user System Programming Used by an authorised party to customise the PBX System Password Extension Number etc Authorised administrator Manager Programming Used by the manager to customise 4 system programming settings of the PBX set a password to each extension print out call log information for each extension System Speed Dialling Number Extension Password Set Call Log Printout for Each Extension Call Charge Management etc Manager and programme call charges Conditions manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest numbered jack jack 01 of the PBX and can therefore perform manager programming Only one system programming including PC programming or manager programming session is permitted at a time These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users During programming the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls System Password To access system programming
103. 208 applies until the TRS check is completed When the timer expires the outgoing outside CO line call is disconnected while dialling if enabled through system programming No Dial Disconnection 211 For a single line telephone SLT an outgoing outside CO line call will be released from the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency receiver when the inter digit timer expires TRS Extension Lock Class The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature 1 8 4 Extension Lock be assigned TRS Extension Lock Class 312 so that even a locked extension can make outside CO line calls The higher COS number will take precedence If for example COS is assigned to an extension TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as 4 when the extension is locked the PBX allows the extension user to make outside CO line calls using COS 4 The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits or TRS Check for and 125 If TRS check is disabled the PBX ignores any nondigits that are dialled when checking which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 8 2 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code Description An extension us
104. 22 2 10 20 nennen enne nnne rnnt enne 234 Route 1 4 Itemised Billing 885 388 234 ltemised Billing Code 389 tiet pice ee 234 Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order 390 235 GO Line Connectiom 400 1 iet iode ct reap ee tet ea Ecc Da Eo Pad Pe esa 235 Dial Mode RETURNS 236 Pulse Speed 402 UE 236 Host PBX Access Code 403 eeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeceeseaeesaeeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeseeeeaeeseaeeaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeeeennees 236 CO Line Group Number 404 237 Flexible Outward Dialling Day Night Lunch 405 4077 essen 237 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 102 emm eene 238 Delayed Ringing Day Night LUNCH 411 413 seen 238 CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 239 417 240 ictzadsizezuM Labbe 240 Automatic Designated Line Access 4191 241 CPC Signal Detection lIncoming 420 241 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing 421 241 Disconnect Time 422 e
105. 262 LCD Language 615 258 LCD Time Display 010 211 LCS Recording Mode Set 620 260 LED Indication 140 Line Preference Override 51 Line Preference Incoming 36 Index Line Preference Outgoing 51 Live Call Screening LCS 147 Lockout 87 Log in Log out 29 M Making Call Features 39 Memory Dialling Features 54 Memory Dialling Features OVERVIEW 54 Message Features 129 Message Waiting 129 Message Waiting for Another Extension 618 259 Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock 129 Microphone Mute 82 Music on Hold 96 Music on Hold 111 216 N No Dial Disconnection 211 228 No Line Preference 36 51 OGM Mute Time 519 251 One touch Dialling 56 One touch Transfer 90 One touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 005 209 Operator Assignment 008 210 Operator Call 180 Operator Manager Features 179 Optional Device Features 102 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD 107 Outside CO Line Access 52 Outside CO Line Call Features 41 Outside CO Line Call Features OVERVIEW 41 Outside CO Line Call Limitation 87 CO Outside Line Group Access 52 Outside CO Line Ringing Selection 18 Outside to Outside CO to CO Line Call Duration 87 P Paging 101 Paging Deny 101 Paging Features 101 Paging All Extensions 101 Paging All Extensions amp External 101 Paging External 101 Paging Group 101 Parallelled Telephone 88 Parallelled Telephone 610 256 Password Security 200
106. 3 4567 Dials 9 101 Automatic Line Telephone No Automatic Line Access No Access No Host PBX Extn No Access Code of the Host PBX Note In this example 0 should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside CO line 1 of this PBX 71 For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 48 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features Conditions e Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA e TRS TRS checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Feature Guide 49 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 Seizing a Line Features 1 5 3 1 Seizing a Line Features OVERVIEW Description A proprietary telephone PT user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call using one of the following features Feature Description Details in Line Preference Outgoing A user can select the line to be seized when going off 1 5 3 2 Line hook Preference Outgoing Outside CO Line Access A user can select the Outside CO Line Access 1 5 3 3 Outside method used when making outside CO
107. 3 to speak to Support caller dials a DISA AA number 3 as directed by the DISA OGM 2 Next the AA second level DISA OGM e g Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team Press 2 to speak to Software Team directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number The caller dials 2 3 Finally the AA third level DISA OGM e g Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith Press 0 to speak to the Operator directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number 1 to be connected to a specified destination extension 102 Note When the type of a destination from 2 level or 3 level AA to another setting is changed any associated DISA OGM will also be cleared In addition any items within the AA menu being removed will also be removed 110 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features DISA Busy Mode If the destination of a DISA call is busy the call will be redirected to an idle extension Hunting Group Set 100 in the destination s idle extension hunting group 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting If no extension in the group is available or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting group the call will be handled in one of the following ways according to system programming DISA Busy Mode 506 a Disconnect The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected b Call Waiting The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting C DISA The following procedure i
108. 300 Host PBX Access codes Host PBX Access Code 403 and 1st Carrier Selection code 1st Carrier Selection Code 359 When the dialled number matches several Leading Numbers in the Call Charge Table the location with the longest matching number is selected The PBX only checks the numbers dialled within a preprogrammed length of time Call Duration Counter Start 204 The rest of the numbers are not applied for the Leading Number check Example Call Charge Table gt Call Charge Table 1 Location Leading Peak No No Flat Charge Unit Charge and Duration and Duration 50 60 5 30 305 45 60 25 305 Cont In this example When dialling 014XXXX and 4 is dialled after the Call Duration Counter Start 204 location number 01 will be selected SMDR shows 014XXXX as the Dial number To increase the accuracy of Call Charge Calculation match the Call Duration Counter Start 204 timer with your telephone company s inter digit timer The call charge rate Peak Off Peak Economy when a call is established is used to calculate the call charge If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside CO line Polarity Reverse Detection 424 the PBX will start the call duration counter Call Duration Counter Start 204 immediately after the Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features outside party answers the call Note that Call Charge Calculation
109. 416 2 DISA Built in AA 501 Programming Example 3 level AA Table In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team extension 102 using 3 level AA programme as follows Distribution method Outside CO Line No Day Lunch Night 1 3 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM2 DISA OGM3 Feature Guide 109 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 level AA DISA AA No 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Extn Extn _ Group 1 Group 2 A p 2 2 level DISA 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 _ _ _ _ Group 3 Group 4 Pd 7 3 level DISA AA No 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mike Smith 2 102 6 1 CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 gt DISA Built in AA 501 2 level AA Select 3 level AA for AA number 3 in DISA Built in AA 501 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 3 level AA Select 3 level AA for second AA number 2 and for third AA number in the 543 of 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 Mike Smith 102 Select Jack 02 for second AA number 2 and for third AA number 1 in the 543 of 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 In this example 1 After or while listening to the AA first level DISA OGM e g Press 1 to speak to Sales Press 2 to speak to Service Press
110. 5 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA can be programmed to be automatically redirected to an extension user s mailbox when the extension user does not or cannot answer them 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing The VPS can answer the call with an OGM e g I can t take your call now and callers can leave messages in the mailbox In order to use this feature a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination extension that received the call CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 41 1 413 and Intercept must be selected through system programming DISA Intercept Mode 507 Outside CO Line Call DISA un VPS Extension gt Port 1 Immediately ae ee Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox after which callers can leave a message for the desired party While answering a call the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for The VPS will answer the transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox VM Transfer Button In order to use this feature the extension user must use a flexible CO Direct Station Selection DSS button customised as a VM Transfer button A voice mail ext
111. 5 party C 2 E 4 A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3 party to 5 party conference call The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call C CO E Extension Feature amp Programming References 1 13 1 2 Conference Call Pickup Tone 117 OOD Ea see Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Pulse Restriction 118 1 1 8 Gec eo Enable Disable Note It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a conversation with an outside party when Pulse or Call Block mode is enabled in Dial Mode 401 Feature Guide 217 3 3 PT Programming Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion 119 11 9 uem uer Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection Bell Frequency 120 1 2 0 Gec eros Lew 20 25 Hz Note This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT Automatic Line Access 121 esser terme s ese Dial 0 9 Not For New Zealand 1 or 9 Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access 2 2 4 Operator Manager Features Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access 122 1 2 2 rone Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access Break Ratio 123 2 3
112. 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Security Mode 51 1 Cyclic Tone Detection 513 EXER REIS Disable times Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Feature Guide 249 3 3 PT Programming FAX Tone Detection 514 514 Bes eo oo 1 2 time s Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA FAX Connection 503 Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 MC 22 RECS 3 6 9 s Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA No Dial Mode 510 DISA Incoming Assignment 516 I 1 NEXT NEXT or PREV uo To continue ooa susc om e 08 Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA AA Wait Time 517 ang 1 5 8 Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Built in AA 501 DISA Tone after Security Code 518 QOE ue Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Security Code 512 250 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming OGM Mute Time 519 esie orones 0 2 4 6 s Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 15 7 Built
113. 905 5 6 5 ferons Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Caller ID SMDR Format 906 e J L6 Without CID Not printed Win CID Printed Note Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service only the number is printed Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Caller ID SMDR Printout 907 QO Ges Ge Enable Disable Feature Guide 271 3 3 PT Programming 272 Note This programme enables a caller s telephone number to be shown by SMDR before the call is answered Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Common Area Call Log Check m continue 9 9 9 Ger sues 08 Di sable To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Type 910 zd 3 FSK DTMF To continue SELECT a Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Currency 921 OOO e scm Max 3 characters Note Currency can be entered using a PT s dialling buttons The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed It is possible to toggle between Alphabet mode and Numeral mode by pressing SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Cal
114. A security code regardless of the security mode DISA OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals such as Caller ID information may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected Because these signals may interfere with DISA the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time OGM Mute Time 519 after a call is connected After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent SMDR The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature The destination of the DISA call DISA security code status Call Deny System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls DISA Incoming Assignment 516 If a DISA call is received at an extension that has Call Deny set the caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring group this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions will still ring Cyclic Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent Cyclic Tone Detection 513 Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside to outside CO to CO line call via DISA Fax Connection System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax
115. ARS 234 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Authorisation and Itemised Code Order 390 To continue JOO ine a frome e 4 X C A 1 H To continue Note C Carrier Access Code A Authorisation Code I Itemised Billing Code Telephone Number Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS CO Line Connection 400 am continue ME fears X Connect Hs connect continue 260 Note The numbers of outside CO line ports that do not have lines connected should be set to Not connect The PBX seizes the highest available outside CO line number when selecting an idle outside CO line automatically If an unconnected outside CO line number is set to Connect and is numbered higher than any connected outside CO line number the PBX will try to seize the unconnected outside CO line Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing 1 5 8 3 Outside CO Line Access Feature Guide 235 3 3 PT Programming 236 Dial Mode 401 To continue MIEL Cue 3 X DTMF Pulse e Block mode continue Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection Pulse Speed 402 e 3 X Low Speed 10 xa High Speed 20 pps continue Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Sele
116. Access DISA line or Uniform Call Distribution UCD group 2 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone 433 434 Day Night Lunch 427 429 New Zealand New Zealand only only 3 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone 433 434 Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand New Zealand only only 4 FAX Connection 503 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 Conditions e To use this feature UCD DISA or Normal must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 DRD must be enabled Distinctive Ring Detection DRD 426 New Zealand only Feature Guide References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 20 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 21 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 5 Call Waiting 22 Description A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting The busy extension user can then answer the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold If Call Waiting is enabled a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions a When an outside CO line call or a doorphone call is received or b When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling BSS feature If disabled a reorder tone will be sent
117. BV Resource 2 Extn 102 Personal Message Area Extn 108 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Total message recording time 60 minutes max Max number of messages 125 messages including Common Personal BV OGMs and Common Personal Voice Messages Total message recording time 60 minutes max Max number of messages 125 messages including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages Feature Guide 117 1 15 Optional Device Features 118 Example Pattern C BV Resource 1 Manager Extn 101 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Extn 104 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message BV Resource 2 Operator Extn 105 Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message Extn 108 Personal 1 i Message Area Message Area 1 Personal BV Personal Voice e Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message 1 1 1 1 1 Personal 1 1 1 1 1 1 Message Total message recording time 60 minutes max Max number of messages 125 messages including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages Total message recording time 60 minutes m
118. Code Order 390 235 AuthorisationCode 77 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 62 Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type 193 Automatic Designated Line Access 419 241 Automatic Line Access Local Access 52 Automatic Line Access 121 218 Automatic Pause Insertion Code 311 231 Automatic Redial 58 Automatic Redial Interval 114 216 Automatic Redial Repeat Count 113 216 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access 122 218 Automatic Route Selection ARS 74 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 74 Automatic Time Adjustment 187 Automatic Time Adjustment 152 222 Background Music BGM 106 Bell Frequency 120 218 Bell off Detection 213 228 BGM Control for APT 626 261 BGM gt Background Music BGM 106 Break Ratio 123 218 Budget Limit Selection 926 274 Budget Management 71 87 Budget Management 925 273 Built in Voice Message BV 116 Busy Line Busy Party Features 62 Busy Tones 281 Buttons and Functions 202 BV Access Code through CO Line 625 261 290 Feature Guide BV Card Initialisation 808 269 BV for Extension 622 260 BV Recording Time 214 228 BV Resource 621 260 BV Total Recording Time 807 269 BV gt Built in Voice Message BV 116 C Call Charge Calculation 161 Call Charge Calculation 441 245 Call Charge Calculation Registering Leading Numbers 161 223 Call Charge Calculation Time Table 1 2 3 4 162 169 176 183 223 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1
119. Duration 168 175 182 189 Feature Guide 161 1 20 Administrative Information Features Programming Example Table Outside EC neo No lt Call Charge Table gt Location Leading Time Table Time Table 1 10 1 Sunday Monday Cont Peak Saturday E Economy Call Charge Table 1 Off Peak Economy No No Flat Charge and Duration Unit Charge and Duration Flat Charge and Duration Unit Charge and Duration Flat Charge and Duration Unit Charge and Duration 70 60s 40 30s 50 605 30 30 s 40 605 25 305 100 180s 50 305 10 505 20 405 20 405 10 605 10 505 20 405 10 605 20 405 100 1805 50 305 Note If the dialled number does not match any Leading Number stored in the call charge table the call charge for location number 99 is applied to the call Therefore it is necessary to set the values for location number 99 4 Calculation Method The call charge is calculated based on the following graph Charge Unit Charge D Flat Charge Unit uration Flat Duration Call Duration 341 4d Waiting time before the call duration counter starts Point where the call charge increases 162 Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features a If the Call Duration is less than the Flat Duration Call Charge
120. GE button or the TRANSFER button respectively Even if there are message waiting indications left at a user s extension the Message Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light that displays notifications from the Message Waiting feature 1 17 1 Message Waiting turns off while the user is viewing his or her extension s Incoming Call Log with the Caller ID Indication Personal Common button e l fausererases voice messages by any method for example by using BV or performing System Data Clear the caller s information is erased from the extension s Incoming Call Log simultaneously Even if a caller does not leave a voice message for example by going on hook while hearing a personal common BV outgoing message OGM the information is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log common or personal area During a conversation with an extension or outside party an extension user can transfer the call to another extension that has set incoming calls to be forwarded to that extension s personal message area or can transfer the call to the personal message area using the Direct Message feature of BV If the transferring user performs Call Transfer with Announcement there is a chance that both parties may be recorded in the same message In this case the information of the last extension or outside party that recorded the message is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log personal area Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Caller ID 1
121. LT on which the call s Caller ID information is displayed and the SLT receives another outside CO line call directly after the SLT will wait until a preprogrammed time has passed SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call 627 before it starts to ring and the new caller s Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT A certain amount of time may be required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly e To enable the Caller ID feature it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern SLT Fixed Bell Pattern 629 as used by the telephone company e When an SLT is programmed to receive Caller ID information the ringing of calls with Caller ID on that SLT is delayed for a few seconds Therefore the length of time before calls are forwarded or intercepted and the length of time that intercepted calls ring at the destination SLT may be slightly shorter than the duration specified through system programming Installation Manual References 2 3 2 3 Port Caller ID Card KX TE82494 Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 125 1 16 Caller ID Features 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Description When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension the information is shown on the telephone display notifying the extension user of the caller s identity This information is also aut
122. Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension 1 17 1 Message Waiting It is programmable whether the calls received on outside CO lines programmed as Normal CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 are forwarded for each extension or not Call Forwarding Selection 963 If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone Answering Machine TAM and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions the VPS or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it To prevent this disable FWD A call can only be automatically forwarded one time In the example below extension A s calls are being forwarded to extension B If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C the extension B user hears a reorder tone and the setting is denied If extension B has already set FWD to extension C and extension A tries to set FWD to extension B the setting is also denied T PP The destination of an extension s forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension FWD AII Calls Incoming Y epee cine call E gee E v E Call or D 2 transfer a call Original FWD destination Busy No Answer No Answer Time The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable Call Forwarding Start Time 202 To Outside CO Line FWD to Outside CO Line System programming determines the extensions that can forward
123. Mode 203 Entering System Programming Mode 203 Exception Code Tables 65 Exclusive Call Hold 92 Executive Busy Override 63 Executive Busy Override 608 256 Executive Busy Override Deny 63 Extension Controlling Features 167 Extension Feature Clear 167 Extension Group 600 254 Extension Jack Configuration 172 Extension Lock 72 Extension Lock CANCEL ALL 72 Extension Name 604 254 Extension Name in Cyrillic 616 258 Extension Number 009 211 Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 217 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 228 Extension to Outside CO Line Call Duration 87 External Feature Access EFA 86 External Pager Access Tone 106 215 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 196 FAX Connection 503 247 FAX Tone Detection 514 250 Feature Guide References 2 Feature Highlights 5 Feature Numbering 188 Firmware Upgrade 195 Firmware Version 998 276 Fixed Buttons 136 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support 132 Flash Recall 85 Flash Recall Key Mode 110 215 Flash Recall Mode for a Locked Extension 108 215 Flash Recall Time 418 240 Flexible Buttons 138 Flexible Outward Dialling Day Night Lunch 405 407 237 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 238 FWD to Outside CO Line 31 FWD gt Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 30 FWD All Calls 31 FWD Busy No Answer 31 FWD Follow Me 31 G General Call Hold 92 Group 174 Group Call Pickup 37 292 Feature Guide H Handset Heads
124. O DIAL STORE Used for System Speed Dialling Saved Number Redial playing back personal common BV outgoing messages OGMs used by the Built in Voice Message BV feature and storing programme changes CONF Conference Used to establish a 3 party or 5 party conference call FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension PAUSE Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number PF Programmable Feature Used to access a preprogrammed feature no default Mostly used as a One touch Dialling button DSS Console Button Usage Flexible DSS Used to call an extension with a one touch operation Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension DSS buttons can also be customised as different feature buttons PF Used to access a preprogrammed feature no default Mostly used as a One touch Dialling button Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature User Manual References 1 1 1 Before Operating a Telephone Feature Guide 137 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal programming The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones PTs and or Direct Station Selection DSS Consoles
125. OM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming Firmware Version 998 Installation Manual References 2 8 1 Connecting Peripherals Feature Guide 195 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer 196 Description If the power supply to the PBX fails outside CO line 1 will be automatically connected to extension jack 01 Power Failure Connections The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure Connections and all existing conversations will be disconnected Only outside CO line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure Conditions Werecommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jack 01 so that the SLT can be used during a power failure Note that if the parallelled SLT is on an outside CO line call when the power is restored that call will be disconnected e Only outside CO line calls are possible during a power failure All other features will not function Automobile type batteries which must be user supplied can be connected as a system backup power supply to operate all the features during a power failure The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables For more information refer to the Installation Manual Installation Manual References 2 2 6 Connecting Backup Batteries 2 9 Power Failure Connections Feature Guide References
126. Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System Feature Guide Model No KX T EA308 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TEA308 Version 3 0 Introduction 2 About this Feature Guide The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System It explains what the PBX can do as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections Section 1 Call Handling Features Describes the features of the PBX related to making and receiving calls and operating telephones Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Describes the features that allow the PBX to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users Section 3 Programming Instructions Serves as an overall system programming reference for the PBX Section 4 Appendix Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the PBX as well as its different tones and ring tones References Found in the Feature Guide Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference Feature Guide References Related section
127. Pause Insertion 47 Pause Time 417 240 PC Programming 182 201 PersonalBVOGM 116 Pickup Dialling Hot Line 61 Pickup Group 127 219 Polarity Reverse Detection 424 243 Polarity Reverse Detection gt Reverse Circuit 45 Power Failure Connections 196 Power Failure Restart 197 Power Failure Transfer 196 Prime Line Preference 36 51 Programming Instructions 199 202 Programming Procedures 207 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 136 PT Programming 185 202 PT Programming References 2 PT gt Proprietary Telephone PT Features 136 Pulse Restriction 118 217 Pulse Speed 402 236 Pulse to Tone Conversion 44 Q Quick Dialling 60 R Receiving Calls 35 Receiving Group Features 23 Redial 58 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion 119 218 Remote Extension Lock 72 Remote Station Lock Control Remote Extension Lock 72 Remote Timed Reminder 168 Reorder Tones 282 Required Telephone 202 Reverse Circuit 45 Revision History 286 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 19 Ring Tone Patterns 284 Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company New Zealand only 284 Ringback Tone Pattern 128 219 Ringback Tones 282 Ringing Line Preference 36 Room Monitor 81 Room Monitor 612 257 Route 1 4 Authorisation Code 381 384 234 Route 1 4 Exception Code 355 358 232 Route 1 4 Itemised Billing 385 388 234 Route 1 4 Selection Code 351 354 231 S Saved Number Redial 58 5 Line Access 52 Seco
128. References 4 2 1 Feature Number Table 192 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 39 5 Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type Description The dialling mode DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Pulse of connected outside CO lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming System Data Clear 999 No system programming in Dial Mode 401 and Pulse Speed 402 is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside CO line is Call Blocking Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software Quick Setup For more information about Quick Setup refer to the Installation Manual 3 1 1 Installing KX TEA308 Maintenance Console on a PC Conditions If no outside CO lines are connected to the outside CO line ports of the PBX the default values are assigned automatically It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode unless the outside CO line is in use In this case the PBX will start checking it after the outside CO line becomes idle This feature will not function properly when It takes seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company The cable from the outside CO line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode If your telephone company
129. Room Monitor set cancel 735 1 0 Room Monitor through a doorphone 31 31 1 2 System Speed Dialling for an SLT dial x 00 99 Timed Reminder set cancel 76 hhmm parameter 5 2 0 Timed Reminder confirm 76 3 Time Service set cancel 78 1 3 0 Walking COS 7 extn password the user s extn no 0 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal 737 0 1 Area disregard the newest call overwrite the oldest call 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common 737 2 3 Area disregard the newest call overwrite the oldest call For New Zealand 1 or 9 499 3 20 49 2 United Kingdom New Zealand Plan 1 50 Plan 2 Plan 3 50 3 For United Kingdom New Zealand Plan 1 36 56 Plan 2 Plan 3 36 56 For United Kingdom New Zealand Plan 1 200 299 for New Zealand Plan 2 200 5 hh hour 01 12 mm minute 00 59 AM PM 0 1 one time daily 1 2 Feature Numbering available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard Features that are available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Feature Numbering Table available while a busy tone or DND tone is heard Feature Numbering Automatic Callback Busy 6 Feature Guide 191 2 3 System Data Control Feature Numbering Busy Station Sig
130. T RR 102 DOO OPEM I se 103 Doorbell Door O11 Nee E 104 Background Music BGM 106 Outgoing Message OGM for 107 Direct Inward System Access 00 108 Built in Voice Message BV eT 116 Galler ID ELI c ulm 122 Caler ND e 122 126 Message FealUF65 icsiskns n aaxkit Hh eina d a kx E Ua ra rx ER UEM GU ELE PEEL UI E EEKUE 129 Message Waiting ER OOo 129 Feature Guide 7 8 Wel fee Absent MESS AOC Cm 131 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal 132 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT ennt 136 UNT NEED Cor IU ERN 136 15182 Flexible nates 138 1 18 3 a aa 140 1184 142 1 19 Voice Mail Features e 144 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT 144 1 19 2 Voice Mail I
131. TEST DATA ARSInter digit Time The inter digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be specified through system programming ARS Inter digit Time 363 e TRS TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification so programme TRS Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number and the leading number of a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number an outside CO line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access 419 is automatically seized PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled extension user makes an outside CO line call by directly pressing a Single CO S CO Group CO G CO or Other CO O CO button or by dialling an assigned Outside CO Line Group Access number and the seized outside CO line has been enabled in ARS Selection 350 the call is made with the ARS feature Feature Guide 79 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 1 Hands free Operation Description A proprietary telephone PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset Pressing specific buttons automatically activates hands free mode Conditions PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands free mode but cannot have hands free conv
132. The following Call Hold features are available Feature Description General Call Hold Any extension user can retrieve a held call Exclusive Call Hold Only the proprietary telephone PT user who held the call can retrieve it Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold Conditions Using the Call Hold feature a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside CO line calls on hold at the same time To hold multiple intercom calls the user should use the Call Park feature 1 12 2 Call Park Using the Call Hold feature a single line telephone SLT user can have either one intercom call or one outside CO line call on hold To hold multiple calls the user should use the Call Park feature If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes the call is automatically disconnected Music on Hold Music if available is sent to the outside party on hold 1 12 4 Music on Hold An internal audio Source external audio source or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming Music on Hold 111 Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall Time 200 a ring tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold If the extension is engaged in a call when the timer expires an alarm tone will b
133. UMS pe Ea 61 Busy Line Busy Party Features vss cciscteccciecscctantesduencsentssnnsncidsccnisiaseaieisenecdeweerescianes 62 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on essen nennen 62 Executive Busy Override Jr 63 Call Waiting TONG 64 Toll Restriction TRS Features 21 11 1111 nennen nennen nnne nean nnn nnn 65 Toll Restriction TRS jasn e 65 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code 69 Budget 1 ina aa RE 71 Extension LOCK M Tc HH 72 buc pope lf 73 Automatic Route Selection ARS 74 Automatic Route Selection ARS esssssssssssssseseeeeeeenn nnne nnns 74 Conversation GnSSAGMAMMA 80 Hands free Operation Re 80 dne a ee en ee ree 81 Microphone NM Ss ao cds en a ees cn asia iMd idus 82 Headset Operation E T OD 83 Data ine puede mtibdadid enu iM a Hc 84 uci T c
134. X T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control 968 JOA Der Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 17 1 Message Waiting Country 995 J00 Ea fn NE ES NE cay Notes This programme specifies your country area when the suffix of the PBX is NE or CE For more information please consult your dealer When the country code is changed all system data is initialised Feature amp Programming References 2 3 6 Country Setting Feature Guide 275 3 3 PT Programming 276 Firmware Version 998 ROM Firmware Y501A 040430 BX 1 0 0 SELECT Warton Date Version Note You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT Feature amp Programming References 2 3 7 Firmware Upgrade System Data Clear 999 lt To select All parameters System parameter and or Speed dial gt JOA De ne All para da para Speed dial continue To select the CO outside line parameter gt JOA roe o we CO para 3 X To continue To select the Extension parameter gt JAA fe 8 oes Co Exin para en To continue To select the DSS parameter gt QOO Cex EE DSS para 2 E 2 To continue Feature amp Programming References 2 3 2 PT Programming Feature Guide Section
135. X TE82460 2 6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers User Manual References 1 8 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 103 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 3 Doorbell Door Chime Description Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls by selecting to hear ringing a chime or both provided a doorbell door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX They can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each doorphone Programming Example In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 extension 101 to be able to receive a doorphone call from a doorbell door chime connected to Relay 2 programme as follows Programming Doorphone 1 2 Doorphone Ringing Enable extn 101 Enable extn 101 Doorphone Ring Chime 2 Chime Chime Doorphone Chime Assignment Relay 2 Relay 2 Doorphone Chime Pattern 4 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 1i Doorphone Ringing Day Night Lunch 700 702 2 _ gt Doorphone Ring Chime 710 3 Doorphone Chime Assignment 711 4 _s Doorphone Chime Pattern 712 In this example When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2 AAdoorbell door chime connected to Relay 2 chimes with Pattern 2 Because Doorphone Ring Chime is set to Chime extension 101 does not ring The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2
136. a Call Log Check 909 eene nennen enne 272 Galler ID Type 9 0 22 8 E 272 eA 272 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 sse 273 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 sss nnne 273 Secret Printing DLA P 273 Budget Management 925 cscccsscsccsecsccasnsccasescnesseseteenctsestenensadeesnsnneresetetbcesesiadecseceesnsutnesdegeadensacensastenteceenseiee 273 Budget Limit Selection 926 ennt neret nennen 274 Next a AP 274 SMDR Mode for Printing 929 essssesssesssssseeeeee nete nnne nennen nennen nennen rennes entente 274 Gall Forwarding Selection 963 ci event ddl eee 274 TRS Check after Answering 966 nenne nnne nennen nennen nnns 275 TRS Check Time after Answering 967 2 400444 4 0 010000 enne nennen nnne nnne nnne ntes 275 KX T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control 968 275 Co ntry 995 T 275 Firmware Version 998 EI E 276 System Data Clear 276 4 PD DOIN
137. aiting time before the call duration counter starts 60s Duration Feature Guide 165 1 20 Administrative Information Features Flat Charges and Unit Charges for each call charge rate Peak Off Peak Economy consist of up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point e g 12345 67 charge of a call can consist of no more than 7 digits For example if the number of decimal places Decimal Places 190 is set to 3 the maximum call charge will be calculated as 9 999 999 even if the actual charge exceeds this Tologthe charge of calls on SMDR With Charge must be selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 Whether nonessential zeros that precede the charge are shown can be programmed in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 e tis possible to control whether Dial number is shown by Call Log Printout Secret Printing 924 User Manual References 3 2 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges 166 Feature Guide 1 21 Description 1 21 Extension Controlling Features Extension Controlling Features 1 21 1 Extension Feature Clear Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone Feature Value after Extension Feature Clear Absent Message Off Automatic Callback Busy Off Background Music BGM Off Call Forwarding FWD Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting Disable Data Line Security Of
138. al Tone Multi Frequency can be selected to match the type used by your telephone company through system programming Caller ID Type 910 Caller ID Display on SLT This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK type Caller ID or DTMF type Caller ID Notes e This feature complies with ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute type FSK and Bellcore type FSK e This feature does not comply with methods using DT AS signal or line reversal signal 1 Caller ID Related Feature Feature Description Details in Incoming Call Log Caller ID information is automatically recorded in 1 16 2 Incoming the call log of the extension that received the call Call Log This information can be used to view a record of incoming calls or make calls to any number in the call log 2 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition When a call containing Caller ID information is received the PBX can add 0 to the caller s telephone number as a leading number if it does not begin with O through system programming Caller ID Automatic O Addition 905 For New Zealand 0 can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8 9 or 10 digits and 00 can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 11 digits or more 122 Feature Guide Automatic Caller ID Number Modification 1 16 Caller ID Features When Caller ID info
139. amming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD UCD Intercept Mode 524 UCD Waiting Message 527 DAT m 1 8 Not Stored Feature amp Programming References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD DISA Security Code Digits 530 HWA Ej oer Lon 10 digits 252 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Note When this setting is changed DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security Code 512 will be cleared Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Ringback Tone 531 aes eus Ringback Tone Hold Music Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 Go to another third AA number 1 1 1 NEXT PREV Goto next or prev 1 third AA number F extension To continue 514 um 40 49 0 9 40 49 0 9 X Jack GRP 657 40 49 0 9 Skip 3 level AA 92102 Not Stored 1 8 Notes This programme is available only when 3 level AA is selected for each AA number in DISA Built in AA 501 e Only when you select X as the third AA number you can select 3 level in the next step Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Clear A
140. and or at a preprogrammed time every day By performing loop current detection at a preprogrammed time every day CO Busy Out Check Time 155 or pressing the corresponding Single CO S CO button on a PT an outside CO line can be returned to in service status once a loop current is detected Also selecting Disable in CO Busy Out 154 returns all outside CO lines to in service status e ncoming calls can be received on outside CO lines set to Busy Out status In this case Busy Out status is cleared Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is restarted 46 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 7 Pause Insertion Description A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling Manual Pause Insertion A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button Automatic Pause Insertion A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the following numbers a Outside CO Line Access number b Automatic Pause Insertion code C Host PBX Access code 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Conditions e The pause length is programmable for each outside CO line Pause Time 417 When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned through system programming Automatic Pause Insertion Code 81 1 a pause will be automat
141. arily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access special services such as computer accessed long distance calling or voice mail services To switch to DTMF mode wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside CO line is connected or press the x key This feature functions only on outside CO lines set to Pulse or Call Block mode Dial Mode 401 DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode The pulse rate for outside CO lines that have been set to Pulse or Call Block mode Dial Mode 401 should be selected depending on your telephone company or a host PBX There are 2 pulse rates Low 10 pps and High 20 pps Pulse Speed 402 It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside CO lines that have been set to DTMF mode DTMF Time 210 It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the key gt Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion 119 User Manual References 1 4 9 Changing the Dialling Mode Pulse to Tone Conversion 44 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 5 Reverse Circuit Description The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make an outside CO line call This detects the start the called party goes off hook and end the called party goes on h
142. ation incoming outgoing b Call charge information outgoing Memory for SMDR A limited number of call records can be stored in the PBX If the memory becomes full the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received 152 Feature Guide 3 SMDR Format and Contents 1 20 Administrative Information Features Example Pattern A Without call charge information Date Time Ex CO Dial number Duration Code 12 31 05 12 52PM 103 03 12345678901234567890123456789012 00 00 16 12 31 05 12 53PM 103 02 lt incoming gt 2013570846 00 01 43 12 31 05 12 54PM 101 02 lt incoming gt 2013570846 00 07 48 12 31 05 12 55PM 101B 02 lt BV incoming gt 2013570846 00 00 43 12 31 05 12 56PM 107B 03 lt DIL incoming gt 0921234557 00 01 43 ee 12 31 05 1 04PM 103 01 092 1438 00 00 06 4536 12 31 05 1 04PM 102 03 lt DISA incoming gt 2013570846 00 00 09 10 12 31 05 1 05PM 103 01 lt DISA incoming gt 00 00 08 20 12 31 05 1 06PM 103 01 092123456789 00 0008 12 31 05 1 06PM C 03 02 0921234567 00 00 17 mE 12 31 05 1 07PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 23 12 31 05 2 15PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 101 12 31 05 2 26PM 103 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 101 12 31 05 2 27PM 108 03 920924567123 00 13 55 12 31 05 3 25PM 02 lt UCD waiting gt 00 11 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Pattern B With call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial number Duration Charge Code 12 31 05 12 52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00 00
143. ation to 5 s or Instantly through system programming Call Duration Counter Start 204 When a user on an SLT that is in TONE DTMF mode makes an SMS call using outside CO lines set to Pulse or Call Block mode through system programming Dial Mode 401 if the SMS centre number is longer than supported for example 16 digits the SMS call may not be completed In this case set the dialling mode of the SLT to PULSE mode using the switch Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features Installation Manual References 2 3 2 3 Port Caller ID Card KX TE82494 Feature Guide 135 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons Description Proprietary telephones PTs and Direct Station Selection DSS Consoles feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access buttons explained below Note that certain models do not have certain buttons For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PT or DSS Console PT Button Function Navigator Key Used to adjust the volume of the speaker handset and headset and the display contrast or to select desired items Volume Key Used to adjust the volume of the speaker handset and headset PROGRAM Used to enter and exit programming mode FLASH RECALL Used to disconnect the current call and make a
144. ax Max number of messages 125 messages including Common Personal BV OGMs and Common Personal Voice Messages If there are new voice messages in a user s personal message area or the common message area if accessible the user will hear a special dial tone dial tone 4 when going off hook In addition if that user s telephone has a MESSAGE button or Message Ringer Lamp the corresponding button or lamp will light when a message has been left A MESSAGE button can be used to listen to the message after the user goes off hook Pressing the lit MESSAGE button on a display proprietary telephone PT while on hook shows voice message information The BV feature allows users to also perform the following operations e f outside CO line calls are preprogrammed to be automatically directed to a common message area CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 or if Direct Inward System Access DISA calls are preprogrammed to be redirected to a common message area via Intercept Routing DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 the caller will hear a common BV OGM and can leave a voice message directly in the common message area Programming Example Outside CO Distribution method DISA IRNA to BV Line No Day Night Lunch Day Night Lunch 1 01 3 BV02 3 BV02 3 Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored 2 DISA DISA Normal BV20 3 21 3 Not Stored OGM4 3 Normal Normal Normal Not Stored
145. call In this case store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the beginning of the dialled number here Added Number gt ARS Modification Added Number 361 Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here ARS Outside CO Line Group gt ARS CO Line Group 364 When making outside CO line calls using the Automatic Line Access number 9 0 assign the outside CO line group s for each Routing Plan number here An outside CO line belonging to the assigned outside CO line group s is automatically seized when making calls using the Automatic Line Access number and the dialled number is applied to one of the Routing Plan numbers Note For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 First Carrier Local Call 050 Long distance Call Second Carrier Outside CO Line Mobile Jack Third 05000 gem International Call 2 s Group 1 Group 2 Feature Guide Programming Example Routing Plan Table 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Modification Routing Leading Leading No ARS Outside CO Plan No 2 Removed Added Line Group s of Digits 1 4 5 07 0 050 All 2 9 0 07 0 050 1 3 07 Not Stored 2 05000 1 4 6 Not Stored 0 Not Stored 2 1 Route 1 4 Selection Code 351 354 2 gt Route 1 4 Exce
146. conference call or vice versa It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Conference Tone 105 Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 4 5 Talking to Multiple Parties Conference 100 Feature Guide 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 1 Paging Description An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once The announcement is heard through the built in speakers of proprietary telephones PTs and or an external pager loudspeaker depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows Type Paging method All Extensions The page is heard through the built in speakers of all PTs External The page is heard through an external pager Group The page is heard through the built in speakers of the PTs that belong to a certain extension group Extension Group 600 All Extensions amp External The page is heard through the built in speakers of all PTs and an external pager simultaneously The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging Deny It is possible for each extension to deny being paged Conditions Hardware Requirement A user supplied external pager A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement It is possible to el
147. cters the amp mark will be shown on the right side of the display The call charge called party s name when a call is made using System Speed Dialling with a name assigned and call duration can be displayed alternately by pressing the CO button whose indicator is green Whether the charge or duration is displayed first can be selected through system programming LCD Display Mode 630 When Call Charge Calculation 441 is set to Disable call charge information is not displayed For each call charge up to 7 digits excluding the decimal point can be displayed If the call charge exceeds 7 digits considering that the decimal point does not move all numbers will be replaced by nines e g 99999 99 The number of decimal digits displayed for the call charge can be programmed through system programming Decimal Places 190 The charge is rounded up to the preprogrammed number of decimal digits On a conference call call charge information is not displayed User Manual References 2 1 7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 143 1 19 Voice Mail Features 1 19 Voice Mail Features 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration Description A Panasonic Voice Processing System VPS that supports APT Integration can provide many features and conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband DTMF Integra
148. ction Dial Mode 401 Host PBX Access Code 403 PREV continue DOO remm fon 3 Up to 8 access codes 1 or 2 digits To continue 0 9 x Note Insert CONF MESSAGE button between each access code using the comma button on the overlay For example to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside CO line 1 programme as follows 403 NEXT 1 81 82 STORE END Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Pause Time 417 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming CO Line Group Number 404 i wexr Prev NEXT or PREV mex ILLE ELLE To continue 3 To continue SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 5 8 3 Outside CO Line Access 2 2 2 Group Flexible Outward UU T eg To continue Go to next or prev jack bn dd a4 x Cen IE pus 05 07 vies 08 X so 05 for day Disable 06 for night To continue 07 for lunch Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number Note It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside CO lines in each time service mode day night lunch In each mode at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside CO line call Feature amp Programming References 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line Access
149. culation 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Entering Characters Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 9 2 2 Beer crore With Charge Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 9 2 13 eer xui MODE 1 MODE 2 Note MODE 1 Does not print out zeros e g 2 86 MODE 2 Prints out zeros e g 00002 86 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Secret Printing 924 gaea ey No Secret Secret Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Budget Management em aaao susc o ue 08 Disable continue ja Feature amp Programming References 1 8 3 Budget Management 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Feature Guide 273 3 3 PT Programming Budget Limit Selection 926 9 2 6 nex sone Enable Disable Note Enable Disconnect the call after the beeps Disable From the next call Feature amp Programming References 1 8 3 Budget Management 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Log Next Page 927 DAO Ge Enable Disable Note This programme specifies whether or not a
150. d is required With the manager password the following 4 system programming settings are accessible e System Speed Dialling Number 001 e System Speed Dialling Name 011 e DISA Security Code 512 DISA Security Code Digits 530 Extension Password for Manager z 4 ahis for PT Programming i igits system password may be entered instead of the manager password With the manager password the manager can also set a password to each extension print out call log information for each extension and programme call charges For more information on how to assign a password to each extension including the manager password and to print out call log information for each extension refer to the User Manual 2 1 7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode 3 2 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges Feature Guide 203 3 3 PT Programming Entering Characters The PT s dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message The following tables depict the available characters Table 1 Alphabet mode Table 2 Numeral mode Times Buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Buttons C1 pe poss qum 2 B C 3 D E F 4 g hii 5 6 M N O m nij o 7 8 8 8 T Ig 9 EE QR AXE ae 0 Space m lt gt CH amp QG
151. d Number Description 9 893 425 9477 101 11223344 P 0123456789 101 893 425 9477 NM Added No Code Pulse Dial Mode 401 P Pause Pause Time 417 Billing Code Authorisation Itemised Telephone A call via provider access is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to 9 The Authorisation code and the Itemised Billing code are transmitted in tone mode The pause time is automatically inserted before entering the Authorisation code 9 593 425 9477 L Pulse Tone Extn 101 11223344 PPPP 012345 P 67890123456789 101 593 425 9477 Added No Authorisation Code Billing Code ltemised Telephone No A call via provider access is made using Routing Plan 2 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to 9 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LA
152. d old call records are stored in each personal and common area Conditions Caller ID Indication Personal Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Indication Personal Common button and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension as shown below Light pattern Status of the corresponding call log Red on There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed Off There are no new call records in the call log or the call log has been already viewed 126 Feature Guide 1 16 Caller ID Features The Caller ID Indication Personal Common button will alert an extension user to any missed unanswered calls The Caller ID Indication Personal Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming call during a conversation and to view caller information while on hook and then call back a caller If a Caller ID Indication Common button is not assigned to any PT the calls will be logged in the personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest numbered jack and its Caller ID Indication Personal button light will turn red Caller ID Selection Personal Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID Selection Personal Common button The Caller ID Selection Personal Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on hook to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call
153. data when the PBX receives a fax CNG tone via the DISA feature FAX Connection 503 The preprogrammed extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set Fax Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times the fax CNG tone must be detected while the DISA OGM Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data FAX Tone Detection 514 If the DISA OGM is short 0 5 s in some cases the fax CNG tone may not be detected In this case it is recommended to set the length of time the PBX continues to search for a fax CNG tone after completing a DISA OGM to 10 s or 15 s through system programming DISA Wait Time after OGM 505 If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded it is recommended to set the length of time to 6 s or 9 s through system programming gt Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 Itis programmable whether a ringback tone Ringback Tone Pattern 128 or Music on Hold Music on Hold 111 is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received DISA Ringback Tone 531 Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV User Manual References 1 2 7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 3 1 Programming Information Feature Guide 115 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 7 Built in Voice Messag
154. de When searching for an available extension any extension that has set FWD AII Calls FWD Busy No Answer or DND will be skipped 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND UCD Busy Waiting Time It is possible to assign the length of time UCD Busy Waiting Time 521 the PBX holds an incoming outside CO line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy and to assign the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs UCD OGM Message Interval Time 522 Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 12 4 Music on Hold 2 2 2 Group Feature Guide 27 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 83 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring Description A Direct Inward System Access DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant AA destination gt DISA Built in AA 501 ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 41 1 413 which allows extensions to be alerted to calls by flashing buttons only Received calls can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if the extension is not ringing vy yy Y Extn Extn Extn Extn A B D immediately ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Rings after a specified time delay
155. de CO Line Ringing Selection Description An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call s from assigned or all outside CO lines through personal programming Conditions e System programming determines which extension s will ring for incoming outside CO line calls each time service mode Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 41 0 e Ifan outside CO line call reaches a user s extension but the extension is set to not ring the CO button will flash The outside CO line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button User Manual References 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 18 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type such as intercom calls Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 calls from each doorphone Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 and calls from each outside CO line gt CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 Available ring tone patterns are as follows Ring Tone Patterns 1s i Single Double Triple S Double S Double is available for doorphone calls only Conditions Thering tone pattern for incoming calls intercom calls and outside CO line calls to a single line telephone SLT can be fixed to Single or Double for each extension through system programming SLT Fix
156. de CO line call duration starts when the specified time expires Call Duration Counter Start 204 The display does not show the duration of intercom calls 142 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Conditions Display Contrast The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector This is available only for PTs Ringer Volume The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector Self extension Number A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display Every time the X key is pressed the display switches between date month day day month and time date month day day month year day of the week and extension number and extension name if stored Date and Time Set The current date and time are set through system programming Date amp Time 000 or the operator manager service features The time format shown on the display PTs while on hook 12 h or 24 h can also be selected through system programming LCD Time Display 010 Characters name or digits telephone number exceeding the maximum length of the display are not displayed However even if the information is not displayed properly the received information is not altered When the information displayed by pressing specific buttons One touch Dialling REDIAL Save while on hook exceeds 17 chara
157. de does not match any preprogrammed code the user will hear a reorder tone Verify Toll An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code Account Code 310 within 5 seconds after seizing an outside CO line to override TRS 1 8 2 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code Classes of service COSs 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2 COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected If the entered account code is also registered as an extension password the extension password feature will be given priority The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied Conditions account code be stored in Memory Dialling One touch Dialling Hot Line Speed Dialling System Personal Call Forwarding FWD to Outside CO Line etc In this case the Account Code feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside CO Line Access number Anextension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside CO line calls Evenin Forced Verify All Verify Toll mode emergency calls can be made without an account code 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 43 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode can be selected for each outside CO line through system programming Dial Mode 401 regardless of the originating extension dependent
158. depending on the time of day and the day of the week 3 call charge rates Peak Off Peak Economy can be assigned for each hour of each day of the week Up to 4 different Time Tables can be programmed Call Charge Calculation Time Table 1 2 3 4 162 169 176 183 Which Time Table is applied to a certain call is decided by the outside CO line carrying the call gt Call Charge Table Assignment 442 Call Charge Table A total of 100 leading numbers Max 10 digits can be stored as destinations to decide how a call is charged for each call charge rate Peak Off Peak Economy A leading number can have different values in each of the 4 tables Which Call Charge Table is applied to a certain call is decided by the outside CO line carrying the call Call Charge Table Assignment 442 The values to be set for each call charge rate are as follows 2 Flat Charge Flat Duration Unit Charge Unit Duration Call Charge Calculation Registering Leading Numbers 161 2 _s Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 163 170 177 184 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 164 171 178 185 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration 165 1 72 1 79 186 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 166 173 180 187 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Flat Charge and Duration 167 174 181 188 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Unit Charge and
159. described below Receiving Ring Voice Indication Type Feature Description Details in Ring No Ring Outside CO Line Each extension can be programmed to 1 1 3 2 Outside Ringing Selection or not ring when receiving an outside CO Line Ringing CO line call Selection Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern A telephone rings when receiving call 1 1 3 3 Ring Selection A different ring tone pattern can be Tone Pattern assigned to each incoming call type Selection Voice calling Alternate Proprietary telephone PT users can 1 5 1 1 Intercom choose how their telephones receive intercom calls by selecting to hear ring tones or the caller s voice Call LED Light Emitting Diode LED Indication The LED indicators on a PT can indicate the status of different lines using light patterns and colours 1 18 3 LED Indication Display Caller Information Display Information A user s PT can show a variety of information on the display such as the outside CO line number the caller s name and number the extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded etc 1 18 4 Display Information Tone During a Conversation Call Waiting When an extension user is in the middle of a call the user can be alerted to a new call by a call waiting tone 1 1 3 5 Call Waiting Feature Guide 17 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 2 Outsi
160. dial Description There are 2 types of Redial described below Type Description Last Number Redial Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled allowing the same number to be easily redialled Saved Number Redial A proprietary telephone PT user can save a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone and then easily redial the number later The saved number is kept until a new number is stored Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands free mode and the called party is busy the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times Automatic Redial Repeat Count 113 at a preprogrammed interval Automatic Redial Interval 114 This feature is only available on PT models that have an SP PHONE or MONITOR button Conditions General Upto 64 digits plus the Outside CO Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial type e Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled or if an incoming call is answered Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature Automatic Redial is not available for some countries areas Last Number Redial stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled Saved Number Redial Save Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Sav
161. during a conversation while receiving a call or while viewing caller information and to inform an extension user that the personal or common area call log is full The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the key instead of the Caller ID Selection Personal Common button while receiving a call or while viewing caller information It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not C Common Area Call Log Check 909 If this programme is enabled the Caller ID Indication Common button and Caller ID Selection Common button can be assigned Incoming Call Log Memory The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited 4 1 1 Capacity of System Resources When a call log is full personal area 20 calls common area 300 calls the Caller ID Selection Personal Common button light will turn red When a caller leaves a voice message it is automatically linked to the Caller ID information in the Incoming Call Log Up to 125 voice messages per BV resource are stored separately from the Incoming Call Logs mentioned above It is possible for an extension user or the operator manager to select whether the oldest call in the personal area or common area will be replaced each time a call is received or whether the new call information will be discarded by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area or 301st Incoming Call Logged in the
162. e 3 1 To continue gu Note Each location 1 3 has a maximum of 4 extensions Feature amp Programming References 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support SLT Caller ID Signalling Type 150 ees een FSK1 During ring E RP AS DTMF1 Immediately DTMF2 During ring Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Feature Guide 221 3 3 PT Programming SLT Caller ID Line Access Number 151 Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 16 1 Caller ID Automatic Time Adjustment 152 go Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 2 3 3 Automatic Time Adjustment Incoming Reverse 153 esr eee eoe Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CO Busy Out 154 1 5 4 sro Enable Disable Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 6 CO Busy Out CO Busy Out Check Time 155 DWE gt eo J 00 59 Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 6 CO Busy Out 222 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Call Charge Calculation Registering Leading Numbers 161 i Next Prev NEXT or PREV Nee yeah cin To continue 1 6 1 Ge ce 00 99 Max 10 digits 0 9 X To continue
163. e 1 8 3 Budget Management Conditions Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on hook the call between both parties will be disconnected A reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before the call is disconnected No operation is necessary When an extension user seizes an outside CO line and then transfers the call to another extension user who can use this feature the Extension to Outside CO Line Call Duration timer starts after the transferred call is answered by the outside party The Outside to Outside CO to CO Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside CO Line feature 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside CO Line feature 1 11 1 Call Transfer Calls using the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Calls using the Unattended Conference feature 1 13 1 2 Conference Feature Guide 87 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 88 Description Any proprietary telephone PT can be connected in parallel with a single line device such as a single line telephone SLT fax machine or modem When parallel mode is used the 2 telephones function as follows Both share one extension number Either telephone or device can make or answer calls Conditions System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT
164. e BV 116 Description If an optional voice message card is installed in the PBX a caller can leave a voice message in a user s personal message area or the PBX s common message area Information on the recorded messages is automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension where it can be viewed later or used to play back the original message 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log The optional voice message card has 2 voice message resources Built in Voice Message BV resource 1 and BV resource 2 and every extension must belong to one of these resources based on system programming BV Resource 621 Extension users other than the operator or manager can access the following options Personal BV outgoing messages OGMs Personal voice messages left by callers via Call Forwarding FWD or Direct Message Messages can be recorded played and erased by that extension s user The operator or manager can access the following options Personal BV OGMs for the operator or manager Personal voice messages left by callers via FWD or Direct Message for the operator or manager Common BV OGMs for the company Common voice messages left by callers for the company Messages can be recorded played and erased by the operator or manager only Up to 125 voice messages with a total recording time of 60 minutes BV Total Recording Time 807 can be logged per BV resource All personal common message areas wit
165. e CO Line is enabled for the extension through system programming Call Forwarding to CO Line 607 Outside CO Line Group Access no Outside Only available when FWD to Outside CO Line is CO Line Group no Phone no enabled for the extension through system programming Call Forwarding to CO Line 607 Voice Processing System VPS Built in Voice Message BV feature no Only available when the BV feature is enabled for the extension through system programming gt BV for Extension 622 Conditions General e This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall Camp on Recall and Timed Reminder Feature Guide 31 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are Call Type Outside CO line calls Normal except for FWD to Outside CO Line Direct In Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercom calls Extension Transfer Uniform Call Distribution UCD When searching for an available extension within a UCD group any extension that has set FWD will be skipped However if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD the call will be forwarded to that extension s call forwarding destination The last member of a UCD group cannot log out When a call is forwarded the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded The MESSAGE button light or Message Ringer
166. e such as 9 Message Waiting has been set or cancelled on the extension Disconnect The caller has hung up 9 FWD to VM Ringback Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS gt 6 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS FWD to VM Busy Tone The called extension has set FWD to VPS and 7 all ports of the VPS are busy Feature Guide 149 1 19 Voice Mail Features Status Condition DTMF Status Signal FWD to Extension Ringback The PBX is calling an extension other than the 8 Tone one dialled most likely because the called extension has set its calls to be forwarded to another extension or because it is a member of an idle extension hunting group 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting System Programming The following settings to enable Inband DTMF Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS This example uses a Panasonic KX TVM KX TVP series VPS which can be connected to up to 2 extension jacks of the PBX Programming Example Voice Mail Table Voice Mail Port DTMF Integration Numbering Plan 3 Jack 03 Jack 04 Enable Enable Enable Plan 1 or Plan 2 1 DTMF Integration 103 2 DTMF Integration Port 102 3 gt Extension Number 009 In this example To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain programme as follows 1 Assign all Voice Mail extension
167. e CONF button 1 Available only when in system personal programming mode 2 Available only when in system programming mode Example of Secret Dialling When storing the number 91234567890 to prevent the telephone number 1234567890 from being displayed when making a call Enter 8 gt NTERCOV AEAEE Ee INTERCOM Notes characters for secret code and entered by pressing the INTERCOM button are counted as one digit each e tis not possible to hide the Outside CO Line Access number 9 0 or 81 through 83 by pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 Conditions Outside CO Line Access by Memory Dialling One touch Dialling System Speed Dialling A specific Outside CO Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialling However if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside CO line the stored Outside CO Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected outside CO line Feature Guide 55 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Description A proprietary telephone PT user can make a call or access a feature with a one touch operation This is possible by storing the number up to 24 digits such as an extension number telephone number account code or feature number as a One touch Dialling but
168. e button Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 2 3 Redialling 58 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Description An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX either in the extension s Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling Conditions General Any number such as a telephone number or feature number be stored in Personal Speed Dialling up to 24 digits and System Speed Dialling up to 32 digits e This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones SLTs Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling numbers 0 through 9 correspond to the numbers F1 through F10 of the Programmable Feature PF buttons assigned as One touch Dialling numbers Assigning a One touch Dialling number to PF button F1 will override Personal Speed Dialling number 0 and vice versa SLT user can check the stored number by exchanging the SLT with a PT PF buttons F1 through F10 correspond to Personal Speed Dialling numbers 0 through 9 Press the desired PF button to check the number System Speed Dialling TRS for System Speed Dialling gt TRS System Speed Dialling Class 301 Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service COS of
169. e heard If the hold recall time is set to Disable no tone will be heard Going off hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re establishes the conversation with the call on hold SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT if the length of time that the Recall hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 207 The following methods SLT Hold Mode 104 are available Mode Hold Transfer to Extension Pressing the Recall hookswitch Pressing the Recall hookswitch Hold 1 Going on hook Extension No Feature Guide 1 12 Holding Features Mode Hold Transfer to Extension Pressing the Recall hookswitch Pressing the Recall hookswitch t t Hold 2 Call Hold Feature No Extension No t Going on hook Pressing the Recall hookswitch Pressing the Recall hookswitch t t Hold 3 Call Hold Feature No Call Hold Feature No t t Going on hook Extension No In some cases a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on hook Instead the call is mistakenly placed on hold After a specified time expires the Hold Recall tone is heard When the SLT user answers this the user hears a cyclic tone like a reorder tone To avoid this problem select Hold 2 or Hold 3 In either of these modes all calls are disconnected when going on hook unless the Call Hold feature number is entered after pr
170. e in Console Paired Telephone 004 should not be assigned in this programme Feature amp Programming References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 2 1 1 Extension Jack Configuration Console Paired ce E 004 08 Disable To A e To delete disable an extension jack number press CLEAR in the extension jack number step e The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console DSS Console Jack Assignment 003 should not be assigned in this programme e An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console Feature amp Programming References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 2 1 1 Extension Jack Configuration One touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 005 0 9 5 Tetons With Transfer SHE Transfer Feature Guide 209 3 3 PT Programming Note With Transfer Press the DSS button to transfer an outside CO line call Without Transfer Press the TRANSFER button then the DSS button to transfer an outside CO line call Feature amp Programming References 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons Time Service Switching Mode 006 OGG uer ipe ferons ene Manual Automatic Feature amp Programming References 2 2 3 Time Service Time Service Start Time 007 Time Service Start Time 007 0 0 7 ve ves Je me 9 1 Day Night Lunch start Lunch end To go to another day of the week To go to another mode 9 9 es UE ooo 00 59 AM PM 1 To keep
171. e line Slow green This extension is holding the line flashing Moderate This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold speed green or using the line for an unattended conference flashing Rapid green Incoming call flashing Red on Line s in use Slow red Another extension flashing is holding the line Rapid red Incoming call flashing 140 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 3 Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern DSS Off Idle Slow red flashing Call Forwarding FWD Moderate speed red flashing Do Not Disturb DND Red on Busy 4 Flashing Light Patterns Slow Flashing o Moderate speed Flashing This setting can be changed through system programming DSS Lamp Mode 112 Rapid Flashing Conditions zy e ncoming outside CO line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority S CO G CO O CO Feature Guide References 1 2 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 12 1 Call Hold 1 13 1 2 Conference Feature Guide 141 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 4 Display Information Description A dis
172. e tee aoe To continue 4 next NEXT SELECT STORE store eno 83 34 3 Single Double 33 for Pattern 2 Triple continue 34 for Pattern 3 sELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 4 Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 1 NEXT or PREV 34 iS To continue 4 NEXT STORE store 38 40 1 3 01 24 38 for day Not Stored To continue 39 for night 40 for lunch SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Call Charge Calculation Tum To continue O00 m 3 X Enable Disable To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Feature Guide 245 3 3 PT Programming 246 Call Charge Table Assignment 442 NEXT PREV Dou coner To continue a 5 2 1 3 Tablet Table2 Table3 Table4 continue 1 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 Without AA With AA SWH aen Note Without AA Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number 009 Outside CO Line Access numbers 9 0 for New Zealand 1 or 9 81 through 83 and the Operator
173. ed gt Call Transfer without Announcement 90 Call Waiting 22 Call Waiting Tone 64 CalerID 122 Caller ID 900 269 Caller ID Area Code 901 270 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition 905 271 Caller ID Display on SLT 122 Index Caller ID Features 122 Caller ID Log Priority 904 271 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls 902 270 Caller ID Modification for Long distance Calls 903 270 Caller ID SMDR Format 906 271 Caller ID SMDR Printout 907 271 Caller ID 910 272 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 89 Capacity of System Resources 278 Carrier Exception Code 300 229 Circular Hunting 23 Class of Service COS 173 Clear All OGMs of DISA UCD 599 253 CO Busy Out 46 CO Busy Out 154 222 CO Busy Out Check Time 155 222 CO Indicator 109 215 CO Line Call Duration Limitation 613 257 CO Line Connection 400 235 CO Line Group Number 404 237 CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 239 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 242 Collect Call Block 425 Brazil only 243 Common Area Call Log Check 909 272 CommonBVOGM 116 Common Personal BV OGM Recording Time 215 229 Conference 99 Conference Features 98 Conference Features OVERVIEW 98 Conference Pattern 116 217 Conference Tone 105 214 Confirmation Tone 170 Console Paired Telephone 004 209 Consultation Hold 97 Conversation Features 80 COS Class of Service COS 173 CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 227 Country 995
174. ed Bell Pattern 629 The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed length of the bell on signal SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 combined with the ratio between the bell signals of the SLT SLT Ring Silence Ratio 142 Depending on the type of SLT being used the SLT may not ring properly if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the telephone company Feature Guide References 1 1 3 2 Outside CO Line Ringing Selection 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 19 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 4 Description Distinctive Ring Detection DRD for New Zealand Distinctive Ring Detection DRD is only available in New Zealand The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside CO line When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns the call will be transferred to the preprogrammed destination s automatically according to system programming In addition the extension ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company Is Pattern 1 Normal Pattern 2 Voice Pattern 3 Modem Voice Pattern 4 Fax Pattern Destination assigned in Ring Tone Pattern assigned in 1 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 410 or sent to the Direct Inward System
175. elect Ringing Line mode only e Aflexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside CO Line Access button Single CO S CO Group CO G CO or Other CO O CO before selecting a line preference e Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference In Prime Line mode if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the Prime Line the user must go off hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call User Manual References 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature numbers The following types of Call Pickup are available Type Description Directed Call Pickup A call to a specific extension is answered Group Call Pickup A call to an extension in the same extension group gt Extension Group 600 is answered Call Retrieving from a A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension gt TAM Extension Telephone Answering 611 is answered Machine TAM Call Pickup Deny An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension If this feature is enabled other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls Conditions Directed Group Call Pickup e Call Pickup applies to Inte
176. eno 0 95 lines Note To enable the changes you must turn the power switch of the PBX off and back on again after changing this setting Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 802 lt Select an e EE ru an me E 8 0 2 SELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE store eno On Off Toll On Off Note Outgoing Call On Print all calls Off No printing Toll Print toll calls only Incoming Call On Print all calls Off No printing Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression 803 HOA Der No Printing Printing Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature System Speed Dialling Number 001 Feature Guide 267 3 3 PT Programming System Data Dump 804 To select All parameters System parameter Speed dial and or Stop output HOA rs All para amp Speed dial To continue Stop output lt To select the CO outside line parameter gt JOA roe ro we CO pata Eu To continue To select the Extension 1 8 0 2 rone Eno Extn para 08 X To continue To select the DSS parameter gt OO Cex
177. ension number must be assigned to the Feature Guide 1 19 Voice Mail Features button when creating it 5 Listening to Recorded Messages After the VPS records a message it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended to indicate that there is a new message 1 17 1 Message Waiting The proprietary telephone PT user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number A single line telephone SLT user hears a special dial tone dial tone 3 when going off hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number 6 Live Call Screening LCS Similar to a conventional home answering machine LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and if desired answer the call simply by pressing the LCS button PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS through personal programming Live Call Screening LCS Mode Set Hands free mode The user can screen calls automatically through the built in speaker Private mode The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox To screen calls the user must press the MONITOR SP PHONE or LCS button LCS LCS Cancel Button A flexible CO DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button 7T
178. ephone Network PSTN access We recommend using SMS enabled Panasonic SLTs 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support Caller ID Display on SLT Optional Caller ID card required The PBX can receive Caller ID information telephone numbers and callers names from calls received on outside CO lines This information can be shown on the displays of SLTs that support Caller ID as well as proprietary telephones PTs when receiving calls 1 16 1 Caller ID 3 level Automated Attendant AA 3 level Automated Attendant AA service allows a caller to dial a single digit number Direct Inward System Access DISA AA number following the guidance of 3 level DISA outgoing messages OGMs and be connected to the desired party automatically 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Call Charge Calculation The PBX can automatically calculate the approximate cost of calls and limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension This feature allows users to calculate the cost of a call based on time the leading digits of a phone number and or the outside CO line carrying the call 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation PC Programming System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software as well as by using a PT 2 3 1 PC Programming The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface RS 232C port or USB port using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console soft
179. equired by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no longer being sent from the telephone company before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost BV Recording Time 214 2 1 4 ELM 1 20 min Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV 228 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Common Personal BV OGM Recording Time 215 2 1 5 1 15 min Note This programme selects the maximum recording time for each personal common BV OGM Feature amp Programming References 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Carrier Exception Code Uc potu ee o ee continue QO fom 20 10 re 0 9 X x To continue a Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS TRS System Speed Dialling Class 301 DW e e 55 1 Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code RICE continue anim 02 05 20 Max 11 digits 2 0 9 To continue 03 for Class 3 04 for Class 4 05 for Class 5 Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Feature Guide 229 3 3 PT Programming TRS Exception Code 306 i Next Prev NEXT or PREV pe
180. er can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll restricted telephone 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialling the telephone number Account Code 310 Flowchart Option Forced No TRS Override by Account Code is attempted What is the account code mode Does the entered account code match an extension password No Does the entered account code match a stored account code Is the COS number No Verify Toll Verify All Yes 1 2 Y Does the entered account code match a stored account code Yes No Y with COS 2 The call is established The call is established with the COS number of the corresponding extension The call is denied The user hears a reorder tone The COS number remains the same as that of the extension being used Feature Guide 69 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features Conditions This feature functions only for extensions whose Account code mode is set to Verify Toll gt Account Code Mode 605 Class of service COS number is set to 3 through 5 If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code an ordinary TRS check is performed System programming determines whethe
181. er locks an extension the operator or manager extension can override the lock and unlock the extension This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control TRS Extension Lock Class The class of service COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature can be assigned TRS Extension Lock Class 312 so that even a locked extension can make outside CO line calls The higher COS number will take precedence If for example COS 3 is assigned to an extension TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as 4 when the extension is locked the PBX allows the extension user to make outside CO line calls using COS 4 Extension Lock CANCEL ALL The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously Extension Lock Button A flexible DSS button on a DSS Console can be customised as an Extension Lock button This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator or manager This feature will not block Emergency Calls 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call Feature Guide References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 5 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Lock 2 1 1 Locking Other Extensions Remote Extension Lock 2 1 7 Changing System Set
182. er outside party via the outside CO lines of the PBX Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single digit number DISA Automated Attendant AA number using DISA AA service DISA OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep When the DISA AA service is active this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit DISA AA number to be connected to a specified destination To access other PBX features such as making intercom or outside CO line calls the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD DISA AA Service DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single digit number DISA AA number and be connected to the desired party automatically The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA AA number 0 9 for each DISA OGM DISA Built in AA 501 These destinations can be an extension number Extension Number 009 an extension group number Extension Group 600 or the DISA AA number of a 3 level DISA OGM 3 level AA Assignment 540 549 During or after the DISA OGM announcement DISA Wait Time after OGM 505 or after a short beep Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 the caller may dial a DISA AA number as directed by the DISA OGM e g Press 1 to spea
183. erase the common BV OGM Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features A voice message area cannot be included as a member of a conference call Evenifa caller does not leave a voice message in either the personal or common message area for example by going on hook while hearing a personal common BV the information is still logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log common or personal area and displayed by SMDR 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Personal Common BV OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals such as Caller ID information may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected Because these signals may interfere with BV the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time OGM Mute Time 519 after a call is connected After the Personal Common BV OGM Mute Time passes DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the personal common BV OGM begins playing APT user can listen to voice messages by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number Installation Manual References 2 3 4 2 Channel Voice Message Card KX TE82492 Feature Guide References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References 1 5 5 Using Voice Messaging Built in Voice Message BV 2 1 6 Recording Playing or Erasing Common BV Outgoing Messages Feature Guide 121 1 16 Caller ID Features 1 16 Caller ID Features
184. ersa To receive SMS information you must subscribe to the telephone company s Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside CO lines through system programming Caller ID 900 Each SMS enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming SLT Caller ID 628 If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling 6 because the selected line is busy when he or she tries to send a text message the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle To send the text message the user must answer the callback ring go on hook and then make an SMS centre call again When a call is received on one of the outside CO lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table the destination SLT may ring one time If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT it is recommended to not connect a proprietary telephone PT in parallel If the PT user answers the call the SMS message will not be received When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding FWD feature the FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR gt 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature because it takes very little time to send SMS messages To verify the duration of these calls it is recommended to set the start timer of call dur
185. ersations e Hands free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds e This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP PHONE MONITOR button is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button User Manual References 1 4 8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset Hands free Operation 80 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 2 Room Monitor Description An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone PT or a doorphone without the destination party knowing Conditions e monitor using this feature an extension must have PT with an AUTO ANS MUTE button or a single line telephone SLT with a MUTE button To be monitored using this feature an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS MUTE button e System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature Room Monitor 612 Adoorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts gt 1 15 1 Doorphone Call If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Doorphone Access Tone 707 e Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored PT User Manual References 1 7 9 Monit
186. es Carrier Exception odes and First Carrier Access code dialled The dialled number is sent to the telephone company Feature Guide 75 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 76 Programming Procedures 1 ARS Mode ARS Selection 350 Turn on ARS for each outside CO line First Carrier Access Code Enter the carrier s access code such as the Host PBX Access code Host PBX Access Code 403 Carrier Exception code Carrier Exception Code 300 or First Carrier Access code 1st Carrier Selection Code 359 For example if the dialled number is 000 93 425 9477 and the First Carrier Access code is assigned as 000 the modified number is 93 425 9477 Consult your carrier for more information Routing Plan Table Leading Number gt Route 1 4 Selection Code 351 354 Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS Leading Number Exception Route 1 4 Exception Code 355 358 Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here Note that the Outside CO Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line Removed Number of Digits gt ARS Modification Removed Digits 360 There may be circumstances where the user dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier to connect the
187. essing the Recall hookswitch It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming Internal Pulse Detection 614 This setting helps the PBX to avoid mistaking pulse signals sent by dialling 1 for hooking in the countries areas where the length of time that the Recall hookswitch is pressed is set to MODE 1 50 180 ms in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 207 Feature Guide References 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call Feature Guide 93 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 2 Call Park Description An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX A parked call can be retrieved by any extension user This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone PT or more than one intercom call or outside CO line call with a single line telephone SLT Conditions Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall Time 200 a ring tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call If the destination is engaged in a call when the timer expires an alarm tone will be heard fa parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied the extension user will hear a busy tone While hearing a busy tone the user can retry by
188. et Selection gt Headset Operation 83 Hands free Answerback 38 Hands free Operation 80 Headset Operation 83 Hold Recall 92 Hold Recall Time 200 226 Holding Features 92 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 207 227 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 48 Host PBX Access Code 403 236 HotLine 61 Hot Line Waiting Time 203 226 Hunting Group Set 100 213 Hunting Type 101 213 Idle Extension Hunting 23 Idle Line Preference 51 Incoming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features 17 Incoming Call Indication Features OVERVIEW 17 Incoming CallLog 126 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 127 Incoming Outside CO Line Call Features 14 Incoming Reverse 153 222 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 802 267 Installation Manual References 2 Installing and Starting KX TEA308 Maintenance Console 201 Intercept Routing 15 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 15 Intercept Routing No Dial 15 Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 250 Intercom Call 39 Intercom Call Features 39 Inter digit Time 208 227 Internal Call Features 16 Internal Pulse Detection 614 258 Introduction 200 IRNA gt Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 15 Itemised Billing Code 77 Itemised Billing Code 389 234 K KX T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control 968 275 KX T7710 One touch Dialling 57 KX T7710 One touch Dialling 013 213 L Last Number Redial 58 LCD Display Mode 630
189. f Do Not Disturb DND Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Hot Line The stored telephone numbers will be cleared Log in Log out Log in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared Paging Deny Allow Room Monitor Off Timed Reminder Cleared Voice Mail Integration Off This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear User Manual References 1 7 8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear Feature Guide 167 1 21 Extension Controlling Features 1 21 2 Timed Reminder Description Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate daily or one time only If the user goes off hook during the alarm a special dial tone dial tone 3 will be heard Remote Timed Reminder An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set cancel and confirm the timed reminder of the desired extension This feature is useful for example for a small hotel or motel to set a wake up call for an extension in a guest room or for a parent to set a wake up call for an extension in a child s room Conditions Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time e Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time Thereis no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time User Manua
190. g Caller ID Selection Common Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation while receiving a call or while viewing caller information display the number of logged calls while on hook and inform an extension user that the common area call log is full gt 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Log in Log out Used to switch between Log in and Log out status 1 2 4 Log in Log out Day Used to change the time service mode to day mode 2 2 3 Time Service Night Used to change the time service mode to night mode 2 2 3 Time Service Lunch Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode 2 2 3 Time Service Extension Lock Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension 1 8 4 Extension Lock 2 way Record Used to record a conversation into the user s own mailbox 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration 2 way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration Live Call Screening LCS Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user s voice mailbox and if desired intercept the call 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration LCS Cancel Used to stop monitoring the user s own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a message 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration
191. h extension is displayed by Call Log Printout e Itis possible to control whether a secret dialling number stored in System Speed Dialling Number 001 or stored as a One touch Dialling button is shown by Call Log Printout Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression 803 When No Printing is selected numbers dialled secretly will be shown as dots e tis possible to control whether Dial number is shown by Call Log Printout Secret Printing 924 e Before changing the decimal point position Decimal Places 190 clear all Call Log Printout data Otherwise the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly Installation Manual References 4 1 5 System Reset with System Data Clear User Manual References 3 2 2 Managing Call Logs and Call Charges 160 Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Description The PBX can calculate call charges for outside CO line calls to preprogrammed destinations The call charge information can be shown on SMDR and the display of proprietary telephones PTs Note This feature is a simple estimation of call charges and will not necessarily match the charges billed by your telephone company Programming Procedures 1 Call Charge Calculation Turn on Call Charge Calculation for each outside CO line to enable this feature Call Charge Calculation 441 Time Table Since the charge of a call may vary
192. he code is automatically transmitted to the VPS If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA from a DISA ring group the PBX will transmit the mailbox number of the receiving extension with the lowest jack number e norder to achieve proper recording quality Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS 1 10 5 Data Line Security Each extension s mailbox number is the same as its extension number f TA series cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX TVM KX TVP series VPS select KX T1232 Follow the steps for the KX T1232 e Ifa callis directed to a VPS port while the operator or manager is recording or playing back an OGM for DISA UCD the PBX cannot send a DTMF signal to the VPS and so the VPS answers the call with an OGM e g Enter the extension number of the desired party User Manual References 1 8 8 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 151 1 20 Administrative Information Features 1 20 Administrative Information Features 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 20 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX 1 SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording SMDR data to a PC printer etc 2 SMDR Output Data The following data can be logged and sent to the SMDR output port a Outside CO line call inform
193. he extension user cannot make further outside CO line calls Budget Limit Selection 926 An extension assigned as the manager can increase the limit or clear the previous call charges For more information refer to 1 8 3 Budget Management Call Charge Management An extension assigned as the manager extension can access the following features through manager programming a Call Charge Reference and Clear for Each Extension Each Outside CO Line Account Code b All Clear Feature Guide 163 1 20 Administrative Information Features 164 Call Charge Print Out d Budget Management for Each Extension 1 8 3 Budget Management Example of Call Charge Reference Call Log Printout for Each Extension 103 Tony Viola Starting Date Dec 29 05 07 00PM Present Date Dec 31 05 09 00PM Date Time Ext CO Dial number Duration Charge Code 12 31 05 12 52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00 00 16 0 04 EUR 12 31 05 1 04PM 103 01 092 1438 00 00 06 0 02 EUR 4536 12 31 05 1 06PM 103 01 092123456789 00 00 08 0 02EUR 12 31 05 1 07PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 13 12 31 05 2 15PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 101 12 31 05 2 26PM 103 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 0 45 EUR 101 Total 1 33 EUR Conditions When searching for a Leading Number in a Call Charge Table the PBX checks only the dialled telephone number excluding Carrier Exception codes Carrier Exception Code
194. hin each BV resource share the total space of the resource For example in BV resource 1 if the common message area currently has 10 messages totalling 10 minutes the personal and common message areas can jointly store up to 115 messages or 50 minutes Feature Guide Example Pattern A 1 15 Optional Device Features BV Resource 1 BV Resource 2 Operator or Manager Extn 101 Extn 102 Personal Message Area Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Extn 103 Personal Message Area Extn 108 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Personal BV OGM E Personal Voice Message Total message recording time 60 minutes max Max number of messages 125 messages including Common Personal BV OGMs and Common Personal Voice Messages Total message recording time 60 minutes max Max number of messages 125 messages including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages Example Pattern B BV Resource 1 Operator or Manager Extn 101 Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message
195. his PBX supports various types of groups 1 Outside CO Line Group Outside CO lines can be grouped into 3 outside CO line groups based on properties such as carrier or outside CO line type CO Line Group Number 404 Each outside CO line can belong to only one outside CO line group Extension Group Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups Extension Group 600 Each extension group can have the following attribute set a Call Pickup Group b Paging Group C Idle Extension Hunting Group d Uniform Call Distribution UCD Group e Direct Inward System Access DISA Ring Group Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension group Assignable Extensions Proprietary telephones PTs single line telephones SLTs Example Extension Group 1 2 1 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4 TEES D M D Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 Extn 108 Call Pickup Group Using the Call Pickup feature extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which they belong 2 2 Paging Group Using the Paging feature extensions can make a page to any paging group or answer a page made to any group 2 3 Idle Extension Hunting Group If a called extension is busy Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same extension group Hunting Group Set 1
196. his is set to display telephone numbers even if the PBX receives caller s name by the Caller ID feature only the telephone number is shown Secret Dialling Controls whether a secret dialling number stored in System Speed Dialling Number 001 or stored as a One touch Dialling button is shown by SMDR Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression 803 Account Code Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code 310 or justthe index of the account code is shown SMDR Account Code 805 The index of the account code is shown when Verify All Verify Toll is selected in Account Code Mode 605 Call Charge Controls whether the charge for outside CO line calls is shown or not Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 or whether nonessential zeros that precede the charge are shown by SMDR gt Call Charge Information SMDR Format 2 923 156 Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features Item Description System programming items Controls whether system programming items that have already been assigned are shown based on the following parameters System Data Dump 804 a All para All data b System para All data except for CO para Extn para DSS para and Speed dial C CO para The data assigned for each outside CO line d Extn para The data assigned for each extension e DSS para The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection
197. ial Tone ARS Inter digit Time 363 5 5 lt x 1 20 s Note This assignment should be the same as the inter digit timer assigned in Inter digit Time 208 Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS CO Line Group 364 em continue mmm e3 X To continue am Note The assignments in Route 1 4 Selection Code 351 354 are effective for this programme Feature Guide 233 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Route 1 4 Authorisation Code 381 384 NEXT or PREV To continue a g STORE store eno 3 Max 19 digits 82 Bout Os 9 P To continue 82 for Route 2 83 for Route 3 84 for Route 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Route 1 4 Itemised Billing 1 NEXT PREV 4 To continue X 85 88 3 Enable 85 Disable To continue 86 for Route 2 87 for Route 3 88 for Route 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Itemised Billing Code 389 1 NEXT or PREV To continue 8 cer e 08 Max 3 digits 0 9 x P To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection
198. ial tone 5 when going off hook If the FWD feature is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is the BV feature number Call Forwarding Selection 963 and the extension has been assigned as Normal CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 outside CO line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will not ring even if the user has set the FWD feature If FWD is disabled outside CO line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will ring Only the operator or the manager can access the common message area including common BV OGM The operator has higher priority than the manager as follows When the operator extension is reassigned the common voice messages except for the personal BV OGM of the operator that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased The new operator can record play back and erase the common BV OGM When the operator who does not share an extension number with the manager is newly assigned the common voice messages except for the personal BV OGM of the manager that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased The operator can record play back and erase the common BV OGM When the operator who does not share an extension number with the manager is deleted the common voice messages except for the personal BV OGM of the operator that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased In this case the manager can record play back and
199. ically inserted after the code This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone company This feature functions for Speed Dialling One touch Dialling Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Hot Line and Call Forwarding FWD To Outside CO Line as well as for normal calls Feature Guide 47 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting extension jacks of the host PBX to outside CO line ports of this PBX A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming Host PBX Access Code 403 is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX The Outside CO Line Access number 9 071 or 81 through 83 of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code for each outside CO line of this PBX A pause of a preprogrammed length Pause Time 417 will be automatically inserted after the user dialled Host PBX Access code Example Telephone Company gae me m Tg Host PBX Access Code for PBX or Automatic Line Access No for Host PBX 0 Host PBX Automatic Line Access No 9 Outside CO Outside Party 01 23 4567 Extn 101 Extn 102 A line 1 Dials 701 23 4567 Access Code Telephone No Dials 9 0 01 2
200. iction TRS total of call charges has reached a specified budget limit 1 8 3 Budget Management n Extension Lock 1 8 4 Extension Lock 42 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing outside CO line calls for accounting and billing purposes Account codes are appended to SMDR call records 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature and have several uses For example a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client and can submit a bill to the client according to the client s account code as shown on the SMDR call record There are 4 methods of entering account codes explained below One method is assigned to each extension through system programming Account Code Mode 605 Mode Description Option An extension user can but is not required to enter a 4 digit account code during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends when a record is needed Forced An extension user must always enter a 4 digit account code within 5 seconds after seizing an outside CO line This method ensures that extension users will not forget to enter account codes Verify All An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code gt Account Code 310 within 5 seconds after seizing an outside CO line If the entered co
201. ide References 1 21 2 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 187 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 4 Feature Numbering 188 Description To call another extension user or to access PBX features access numbers extension numbers or feature numbers are required Feature numbers are available while 1 2 3 4 a dial tone is heard a busy tone or Do Not Disturb DND tone is heard dialling or talking on hook 1 Feature Numbering available while a dial tone is heard Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and flexible numbers respectively shown in the following table a b Extension Numbers The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming Extension Number 009 When the extension numbering plan is selected the default extension numbers change automatically as follows Plan 1 Plan 2 extension jacks 01 through 08 extension numbers 101 through 108 Plan 3 extension jacks 01 through 08 extension numbers 11 through 18 If a rotary single line telephone SLT is used at any extension select Plan 1 Note For United Kingdom and New Zealand when the extension numbering plan is selected the default extension numbers change automatically as follows Plan 1 Plan 2 extension jacks 01 through 08 extension numbers 201 through 208 Plan 3 extension jacks 01 through 08 extension numbers 21 through 28 Feature Numbers When P
202. idle if BGM is enabled through system programming BGM Control for APT 626 Installation Manual References 2 8 1 Connecting Peripherals User Manual References 1 7 5 Turning on the Background Music BGM 106 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD Description An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages OGMs for the following features Feature Usage Details in Direct Inward System Access DISA When a call arrives on a DISA line the caller will hear a DISA OGM 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 level Automated Attendant AA When the DISA AA service is active the caller will hear a DISA OGM The DISA AA service supports up to 3 levels of DISA OGMs 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy the caller will hear a UCD OGM 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution gt UCD Waiting Message 527 UCD Conditions This feature functions differently from personal common BV OGMs used by the BV feature 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV To use this feature DISA or UCD must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port C CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 The operator or manager can record a maximum
203. ill be sent to all parties when a 2 party conference call is changed to a 3 party conference call It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Conference Tone 105 Unattended Conference Recall The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator s extension 50 seconds before the timer expires A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer expires If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected the Feature Guide 99 1 13 Conference Features timer will be cancelled If not the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard until the unattended conference call is disconnected 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation Anunattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party through system programming Call Transfer to CO Line 606 5 party Conference e The following features will not function during a 5 party conference call Call Hold Call Park Call Splitting Call Transfer Executive Busy Override Unattended Conference A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5 party conference call is established and when a 5 party conference call is changed to a 4 party
204. ill be sent to the caller and the call will be disconnected Feature Guide 111 1 15 Optional Device Features Security Mode Intercom Calls Outside CO Line Calls All Security Trunk Security v No Security v v v Permitted Outside to Outside CO to CO Line Calls through DISA 112 DISA callers can use DISA to make outside CO line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA the length of the call can be limited to a preprogrammed duration CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 A timer will activate when the call is connected and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires When the timer expires the call is disconnected 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation To detect the end of an outside to outside CO to CO line call Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection can be assigned through system programming CPC Signal Detection Incoming 420 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing 421 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features Flowchart A DISA call from an outside party is received DISA Delayed Answer Time expires The PBX answers the call DISA OGM Mute Time expires Yes No Is the assigned DISA OGM recorded One short beep DISA OGM L 22 2 2 Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires
205. ime after OGM 051 0 2 24 4 01 2 1 0 247 DISA Busy Mode b06 1 noH eer ret Pee n rt sa eres Re sep ence eta eta east ence i EREE Bre NER Me RUBER 247 DISA Intercept Mode 507 247 DISA Ring Time before Intercept 508 248 DISA Ring Time after Intercept 509 248 DISA No Dial Mode 510 metre tee rester EL PEE Fei sedie 248 DISA Security Mode 248 DISA S curity Code J512 249 Cyclic Tone Detection 513 249 FAX Tone Detection 514 5 6 2 tee e cc re Ei ee eie a deni a a Pedes ea 250 Intercept Time for Internal DISA 515 nennen nnne nennen 250 DISA Incoming Assignment 516 sese nnne enne nnne nnns enne 250 DISA AA Wait Time 5 17 i irr tine e RR ERR E REFERRE RR SERRE Pe ERR NR eA e IRE ee RT RARE 250 DISA Tone after Security Code 518 sse nnne nenne nnne nne nnne nnne 250 OGM Mute Time519 ere iE dietro the s uet ok ses E ean 251 520
206. iminate the tone through system programming External Pager Access Tone 106 Only one person can use this feature at a time Extensions that cannot be paged are Ringing or busy PTs PTsin Paging Deny mode PTsin DND mode 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Installation Manual References 2 8 1 Connecting Peripherals User Manual References 1 6 1 Paging 1 6 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement Feature Guide 101 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Description A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination Extension users can call a doorphone Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature 1 10 2 Room Monitor Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional doorphone and doorphone card A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Doorphone Access Tone 707 Ring Duration If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period Doorphone Ring Time 708 ringing stops and the call is cancelled An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system programming Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern 706 Call Destination System programming determ
207. ination Programming Example SMS Routing Table without Sub address Numbers When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is 1112224444 and the telephone numbers of each outside CO line are 3847001 for CO 1 3847002 for CO 2 and 3847003 for CO 3 programme as follows 1 PBX setting SMS Centre Number for Receiving 1112224444 Location No Outside CO Line No Extension Jack No 1 CO 1 Jack 01 2 CO2 Jack 02 3 Jack 03 If the SMS centre does not support sub address numbers only one SLT can be assigned for each location One location can be used for each outside CO line telephone number Feature Guide 133 1 17 Message Features 134 2 SLT setting Extension Jack No SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for SMS Sub Sending Receiving address Jack 01 89 P1112223333 1112224444 Jack 02 89 P1112223333 1112224444 Jack 03 89 P1112223333 1112224444 Cont In this example a Tosend an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01 enter 3847001 as the destination b Tosend an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02 enter 3847002 as the destination C Tosend an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 03 enter 3847003 as the destination Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional Caller ID card The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS enabled SLTs and vice v
208. ines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each time service mode Doorphone Ringing Day Night Lunch 700 702 Door Open While on a doorphone call an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in 1 15 2 Door Open When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone PT a tone is heard instead of ringing Installation Manual References 2 3 3 2 Port Doorphone Card KX TE82460 2 6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers Feature Guide References 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References 1 8 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected 102 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 2 Door Open Description Using an extension telephone an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the door for each time service mode Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 While on a doorphone call any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Conditions Hardware Requirement A user supplied door opener installed on each door optional doorphone and doorphone card door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed Door Open Duration An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time Door Open Duration 709 Installation Manual References 2 3 3 2 Port Doorphone Card K
209. ion number of the desired party It is possible to access VM service from AA service to for example record messages 2 VMService Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties such as an extension user Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience AA Service A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode the caller will hear an outgoing message OGM After or while listening to the OGM the caller may dial an extension number as directed e g Enter the extension number of the desired party If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status This enables the VPS to quickly play an appropriate OGM to the caller e g I m handling another call now I m away from my desk now etc The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below DTMF Status Signals Status Condition DTMF Status Signal Ringback Tone The PBX is ringing the corresponding 1 extension Busy Tone The called extension is busy 2 Reorder Tone The dialled number is invalid 3 DND Tone The called extension has set DND 1 3 1 3 4 Do Not Disturb DND Answer The called extension has answered the call 5 Confirm The PBX confirms that a featur
210. ished network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA Emergency numbers such as the police or fire services should be stored Emergency Number 309 so that they are not barred by TRS Host PBX Access Code Carrier Exception Code TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code gt Feature Guide 67 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 68 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX or Carrier Exception code Access Code Type Access Code is stored in the PBX Access Code is dialled Access Code is not dialled Access Code is not stored in the PBX Host PBX Access TRS ignores the code Number dialled is not an TRS checks the entire Code and checks the outside CO line call so number remaining digits TRS does not check the number Carrier Exception TRS ignores the code TRS checks the entire TRS checks the entire Code and checks the number number remaining digits 1 Host PBX Access Code 403 2 s Carrier Exception Code 300 The inter digit timer Inter digit Time
211. k to Sales Press 2 to speak to Support Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location Since DISA AA numbers are single digits if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period gt DISA AA Wait Time 517 DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the caller is trying to access a specific feature When the DISA AA service is used Incoming Dial Mode must be set to With AA through system programming DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode 500 When With AA is selected the PBX regards caller dialled digits through 9 as DISA AA numbers If no destination is assigned to 9 or 0 the PBX regards the number 9 0 as the Automatic Line Access number Automatic Line Access 121 or Operator Call number Note For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features Programming Example 1 level DISA AA Table In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith extension 102 using 1 level DISA AA programme as follows Distribution method Outside CO Line No Day Lunch Night 1 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1 DISA OGM1 2 3 Normal Normal Normal DISA AA No for 1 level AA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Mike Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Smith 103 104 105 106 107 108 Group 1 102 Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414
212. k to answer it the VPS will either stop or continue recording the message according to system programming LCS Recording Mode Set 620 If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension has Call Waiting activated the user will hear a call waiting tone The user can put the existing call on hold before accessing LCS 2 way Recording into the VPS Ifall ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2 way Record button The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2 way Transfer button followed by an extension number Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 8 8 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode 148 Feature Guide 1 19 Voice Mail Features 1 19 2 Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration Description A Panasonic Voice Processing System VPS or similar product from another manufacturer can provide Automated Attendant AA and Voice Mail VM services when connected to the PBX The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals For more information refer to the documentation provided with the VPS 1 AAService Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party e g Enter the extens
213. l Log Incoming Call Log 20 entries extn 300 entries PBX 125 voice messages Built in Voice Message BV resource Password System Password 4 7 digits Extension Password 4 digits Voice Message Access Code 4 10 digits Feature Guide 279 4 2 Tones Ring Tones 4 2 Tones Ring Tones 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Dial Tone 1 Normal Dial Tone 2 Any of the following features is set Absent Message e Background Music BGM proprietary telephone PT only Call Forwarding FWD Call Pickup Deny e Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND e Extension Lock e HotLine single line telephone SLT only Message Waiting PT only e Remote Extension Lock Timed Reminder Dial Tone 3 When going off hook with an SLT that has messages waiting e When Account Code Entry is performed When answering call from Timed Reminder 280 Feature Guide Brazil only Brazil only 1s LI 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Dial Tone 4 A new voice message has been recorded Built in Voice inni nni Message BV Brazil only imma AA Dial Tone 5 The remaining voice message 22 inni minutes or 125 voice messages have been recorded Built in Voice Brazil only Message BV QM Tnm Busy Tones 2216 Brazil
214. l References 1 7 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder 2 1 3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions Remote Timed Reminder Wake up Call 168 Feature Guide 1 22 Audible Tone Features 1 22 Audible Tone Features 1 22 1 Dial Tone Description The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions Type Description Tone 1 A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2 through 5 have been set Tone 2 Heard when any of the following features is set Absent Message e Background Music BGM for proprietary telephones PTs only e Call Forwarding FWD Call Pickup Deny e Data Line Security Not Disturb DND e Extension Lock HotLine for single line telephones SLTs only Message Waiting for PTs only e Remote Extension Lock e Timed Reminder Tone 3 Heard when any of the following features is performed e Account Code Entry Answering a call from Timed Reminder Going off hook with an SLT that has messages waiting Tone 4 Heard when going off hook if new voice messages have been recorded Built in Voice Message BV Tone 5 Heard when going off hook if the remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or if 125 voice messages have been recorded Built in Voice Message BV Conditions Dial Tone Type for ARS Account Code Entry Verify Toll mode only Through system p
215. lan 2 or Plan 3 is selected feature numbers starting with 7 are useable with and without added before 7 Example The default feature number for setting Do Not Disturb DND is 714 714 and 714 are both available for Plan 2 and Plan 3 To make them easier to remember it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for Plan 2 and Plan 3 with the code numbers 50 through 59 through system programming Second Feature Numbering Plan 012 Feature Guide Feature Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard 2 3 System Data Control Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 Absent Message set cancel 75 1 6 parameter 0 0 Account Code Entry for an SLT X X or 49 account code outside phone no Automatic Line Access Local Access 9 0 outside phone no Built in Voice Message BV record play 725 1 extn no 2 0 erase 0 Call Forwarding FWD AII Calls Busy No 71 1 or 2 extn no Answer set cancel 0 0 Call Hold Hold Mode 2 or 3 for an SLT 2 20 20 Call Hold Retrieve for outside CO line calls 53 5 59 5 outside CO line no intercom calls 1 3 no Call Park Call Park Retrieve 3 22 52 122 156 0 9 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 72 1 0 0 Call Waiting for intercom calls doorphone 732 1 0 0 ca
216. lephone PT user who originated a conference with 2 outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation The user may return to the conference at any time if he or she desires 5 party Conference A PT user can establish a 3 party to 5 party conference call by entering the 5 party Conference feature number Conditions General Conference call arrangement The following configurations of 3 party or 5 party conference calls are possible at the same time through system programming Conference Pattern 116 8 party conference calls between extensions Up to 3 conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties Up to 4 8 party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party Up to 4 conference call with up to extensions when using Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration with up to 4 extensions when not using Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration or with a combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties One Conference Button On a PT that does not have a CONF Conference button a flexible CO button can be customised as a Conference button Consultation Hold When an extension user tries to establish a conference call the current call is automatically placed on consultation hold until the conference is established 1 12 5 Consultation Hold 3 party Conference A confirmation tone w
217. ll Call Charge Calculation 441 Up to 3 currency characters e g EUR for Euro can be assigned through system programming Currency 921 The charge can consist of up to 7 digits e g 88888 75 and the number of decimal places can be assigned through system programming 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation 77 A maximum of 32 digits can be shown when Without Charge is selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 If With Charge is selected the maximum is 24 digits The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether or how they are printed or displayed by SMDR Programmable Items Item Description Incoming Outgoing outside Controls whether incoming outgoing outside CO line calls are CO line call shown Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 802 Even if On or Toll is selected for outgoing outside CO line calls or even if On is selected for incoming outside CO line calls when MODE 2 is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing 929 the call log information is not displayed by SMDR but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout If Toll is selected for outgoing outside CO line calls only calls that are checked in TRS COS 2 5 Denied Code 302 305 and are allowed are shown Caller s identification Controls whether a caller s telephone number is shown Caller ID SMDR Format 906 When t
218. ll OGMs of DISA UCD 599 QOS wx Feature amp Programming References 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD Feature Guide 253 3 3 PT Programming 254 Extension Group 600 NEXT or PREV To continue 6 9 9 ner rone 08 X SELECT To Ee Feature amp Programming References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 2 2 2 Group T UNT fur E en continue oA some 08 b 2 continue 02 for night 03 for lunch sELECT a l Feature amp Programming References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Extension Name 604 To continue 6 0 4 stone emo Max 10 characters To m Note An extension name can be entered using a PT s dialling buttons The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed It is possible to toggle between Alphabet mode and Numeral mode by pressing SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Entering Characters Account Code Mode em 81251 muc 08 Option Forced Verify All Verify Toll To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry 1 8 2 Toll Restriction TRS Override by Account Code Account Code 310 Call Transfer to CO Line To contin
219. ll is being transferred 1 12 4 Music on Hold An internal audio source external audio source or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming Music Hold 111 Outside CO Line Call Duration If an outside CO line call is transferred to an outside party the call duration will be restricted by a system timer CO to CO Line Call Duration 205 Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation The extension that transferred the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires 1 12 1 Call Hold When the timer expires the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation again If a CPC Calling Party Control signal or reverse signal is received from an outside CO line the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected 90 Feature Guide 1 11 Transferring Features Consultation Hold When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall hookswitch on an SLT the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold 1 12 5 Consultation Hold Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 91 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 1 Call Hold 92 Description An extension user can put a call on hold
220. lls set cancel Call Waiting for outside CO line calls set 731 1 0 0 cancel Common BV Outgoing Message OGM 722 01 24 1 2 0 0 record play erase Conference 5 party 22 22 phone no CONF 4 times CONF Data Line Security set cancel 730 1 0 0 Directed Call Pickup 4 41 extn no Do Not Disturb DND set cancel 71 4 0 0 Doorphone Call Door Open 31 55 31 55 1 2 Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel 733 0 1 0 Extension Lock set cancel 77 0000 9999 2 times one time 0 Extension Number 4 100 199 100 499 10 49 External Feature Access EFA for an SLT 6 Extension Feature Clear 79 3 0 FWD Follow Me set cancel 71 5 8 extn no 0 FWD to BV set cancel 71 1 or 2 725 0 0 Feature Guide 189 2 3 System Data Control Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 FWD to Outside CO Line set cancel 71 3 outside CO line access no outside phone no 0 0 FWD to Voice Processing System VPS 71 or 2 extn no set cancel 0 0 Group Call Pickup 40 40 Hot Line for an SLT programme 74 2 phone no Hot Line for an SLT set cancel 74 1 0 0 Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area 70 CLEAR ALL Incoming Call Log in the Common Area 70x CLEAR ALL Last Numbe
221. mat varies depending on the user s country area 2 Charge shows the call charge when Call Charge Calculation is enabled Call Charge Calculation 441 and With Charge is selected Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 through system programming A call charge of up to 7 digits is shown for each call and the Total can consist of up to a maximum of 17 digits including whole numbers max 10 digits the decimal point and a preprogrammed number of decimal digits max 6 digits Decimal Places 190 If the call charge exceeds the maximum number of digits considering that the decimal point does not move all numbers will be replaced by nines Conditions Call Log Printout data is not deleted even if the PBX is restarted It is cleared through manager programming or by performing System Data Clear Even if an extension user holds a call the duration of the call will be counted If an extension user transfers the call the count of duration will restart at the destination extension SMDR Mode for Printing One of the following modes can be selected through system programming SMDR Mode for Printing 929 Feature Guide 159 1 20 Administrative Information Features a MODE 1 Outside CO line call information is displayed by SMDR gt 1 20 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and call log information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout b MODE2 Only call log information for eac
222. me Table has 3 modes day night and lunch A Time Table can be programmed to control when each time service mode starts and therefore the previous time service mode ends and can be programmed separately for each day of the week Programming Example Time Table Time Schedule Day Night Lunch Start Time Start Time Start Time End Time Sunday Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored Monday 09 00 17 00 12 00 13 00 Tuesday 09 00 17 00 12 00 13 00 Cont _s Time Service Start Time 007 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Visualisation of Time Schedule ig Monday ba 00 00 03 00 06 00 09 00 12 00 15 00 18 00 21 00 00 00 Time Table Night Day Lunch Day Night Day Lunch Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed for example night mode can occur in the morning and afternoon if necessary and not all time service modes need to be used in a time schedule Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends 3 Programming Items Using Time Service The following programming items will be affected by the time service a Flexible Outward Dialling Day Night Lunch 405 407 b Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 C Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 411 413 d COLine Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 e DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment Day Night Lu
223. mised Billing Code 389 An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension It is possible to add the Itemised Billing code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside CO line through system programming Route 1 4 Itemised Billing 385 388 Feature Guide 77 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Sequence of Transmitted Code Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order 390 The sequence of transmitted codes C Carrier Access Code A Authorisation Code Itemised Billing Code Telephone Number can be selected When C I A H is selected the dialled numbers of Itemised Billing Code I and Authorisation Code A are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Programming Example Authorisation amp Itemised Billing Code Table Modification Routing Leading Authorisation Itemi Plan No No Removed Added No Code temised Billing No of Digits 1 8 0 11223344 0123456789 Enable on CO 1 2 on CO 1 2 Itemised Billing Code Extn 101 2 5 0 11223344PPPP 167890123456 Enable on CO 1 012345 789 on CO 1 Itemised Billing Code PPPP 6 s Extn 101 X Pulse to Tone Conversion 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection 1 Route 1 4 Authorisation Code 381 384 2 gt Route 1 4 Itemised Billing 385 388 In this example Dialled Number Modifie
224. mming details refer to the on line help that is installed along with KX TEA308 Maintenance Console 3 2 1 Installing and Starting KX TEA308 Maintenance Console The KX TEA308E the KX TEA308NE the KX TEA308GR the KX TEA308CE C and the KX TEA308PD designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Company U K Ltd declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting http www doc panasonic de Contact Panasonic Services Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany Trademarks Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Intel and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners Feature Guide 3 4 List of Abbreviations A AA APT ARS BGM BSS BV COS CPC DIL DISA DND DRD DSS
225. n connected to extension jack 01 can access system programming Only one system programming session can be performed at a time that is only one user can access system programming at a time This includes PC programming Buttons and Functions Fixed Button KX T7730 KX T7735 Function REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS SP PHONE NEXT FWD DND 4 MESSAGE INTERCOM SECRET AUTO DIAL STORE STORE PAUSE PAUSE 2 PROGRAM HOLD END AUTO ANS SELECT MUTE 202 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Fixed Button KX T7730 KX T7735 Function FLASH RECALL FLASH O TRANSFER CLEAR Entering System Programming Mode Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX features and parameters To enter system programming mode the system password is required With the system password all system programming is accessible PROGRAM System Password for x gt Programming No d Administrator for PT Programming 9 9 3 digits 1234 Note means default value throughout these programming instructions Entering Manager Programming Mode Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension extension jack 01 to set certain PBX features and parameters To enter manager programming mode the extension password for the manager manager passwor
226. n order to connect themselves to the desired party e g Enter the extension number of the desired party It is possible to access VM service from AA service to for example record messages 144 Feature Guide 1 19 Voice Mail Features 3 VMService Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties such as an extension user Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience AA Service A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode the caller will hear an outgoing message OGM After or while listening to the OGM the caller may dial an extension number as directed e g Enter the extension number of the desired party 1 AAto Extension AA receives and answers outside CO line calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party Outside CO Line Call Extension l 2nsfer posce AR Busy No Answer AA Hunting Chain Record message 2 Extension Backup If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions for example the operator for the same outside CO line the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside CO line call In order to use this feature Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS Delayed
227. nal Caller ID card is installed and With CID is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format 906 It is also possible to show a caller s telephone number before the call is answered gt Caller ID SMDR Printout 907 Also shows the following codes DISA incoming Incoming outside CO line call via the DISA feature BV incoming Incoming outside CO line call to the common message area of the BV feature DIL incoming Incoming outside CO line call via the DIL feature 1 1 1 1 Direct In Line DIL UCD waiting Incoming outside CO line call via the UCD feature 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD When the UCD waiting call is answered a new record is started 6 Duration Shows the duration of the outside CO line call or the UCD call waiting time in hours minutes seconds 7 Code Shows the account code appended to the call 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry the account code index number e g 13 the number of the extension that used the Walking COS feature e g 101 or DISA security code status e g 0 0 A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code 1 to 4 A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR DISA Security Code 512 Feature Guide 155 1 20 Administrative Information Features Section Number Data Description 8 Charge Shows the call charge of the outside CO line ca
228. nalling BSS DND Override 2 Executive Busy Override 3 3 Feature Numbering available while dialling or talking Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Feature Numbering Table available while dialling or talking Feature Numbering Alternate Calling Ring Voice x Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine TAM 4 Conference 3 party for an SLT 3 2 Door Open 5 Pulse to Tone Conversion xd 1 Dial after dialling the TAM s extension number and hearing its busy tone 2 Plan 1 3 Plan 2 Plan 3 43 4 Feature Numbering available while on hook Features that are available while on hook have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Feature Numbering Table available while on hook Feature Numbering Background Music BGM set cancel 1 Time Service mode display Extension number and extension name display x date month day day month and time display date month day day month year day of the week display changing Conditions If a feature number includes X or except for those that can use 0 instead of 7 rotary SLT users cannot use it Feature number Additional number Parameter Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by O User Manual
229. nband ume 149 1 20 Administrative Information Features 152 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 152 1 20 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR ssssssesseseeeeeeeeenenen nennen nennen nnne trennen nennen 152 1 20 1 2 Call Log Printout for Each 159 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation E 161 1 21 Extension Controlling 167 1 21 1 Extension Feature Clear esssssessssesseseeeeeeee enne en nnne nnne nens 167 w212 Timed RemiNde ete 168 1 22 TONG 2 0202 2 169 DC REP INDE 169 1 22 2 Confirmation idco diete 170 2 System Configuration and Administration Features 171 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 172 2 1 1 macies qtii 172 2 2 System Configuration Software 173 2 NES Ol Service COS m 173 Dat MODULE satt I MI RIAM IM ID EM 174 223 EI 3 c 176 2 2 4 Feat mee
230. nce Feature amp Programming References 1 10 2 Room Monitor CO Line Call Duration Limitation 3 Gy ce suec ue 08 EJ Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 10 8 Outside CO Line Call Limitation Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 Feature Guide 257 3 3 PT Programming Internal Pulse Detection 4 PERERA a To continue e C Ge 08 Disable lt continue Feature amp Programming References 1 12 1 Call Hold Hookswitch Flash Timing Range 207 LCD Language 615 To continue OOO so we 08 X to the note To continue Notes following languages are available for the LCD English Spanish Portuguese Russian Greek Czech Hungarian Slovak Polish Italian Ukrainian Selections vary depending on your country area e Russian display is only available for the KX T7730 KX T7735RU e When Russian or Ukrainian is selected in this programme during intercom calls the calling extension s name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic 616 is displayed atthe called extension When another language is selected the calling extension s name assigned in Extension Name 604 is displayed Extension Name in Cyrillic fs 6 continue 6 1 6 vec rone Max 10 characters continue
231. nch 427 429 New Zealand only f DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment Day Night Lunch 430 432 New Zealand only g DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 h TRS COS Day Night Lunch 601 603 i Ringing Day Night Lunch 700 702 j Door Opener Day Night Lunch 703 705 4 Day Night Lunch Button A flexible Direct Station Selection DSS button can customised as a Day Night or Lunch button by the operator or manager These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode Each button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status Off Day Night Lunch off Red on Day Night Lunch on Note Extension users can press the key on their proprietary telephones PTs to display the current time service mode Conditions start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system programming Time Service Start Time 007 Feature Guide 177 2 2 System Configuration Software Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 7 7 Checking the Time Service Mode 2 1 2 Switching the Time Service Mode Time Service 178 Feature Guide Description 2 2 4 Operator Manager Features 2 2 System Configuration Software This PBX supports one operator and one manager Any extension can be designated as the operator through system programming Operator Assignment
232. nd Feature Numbering Plan 012 212 Secret Dialling 55 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression 803 267 Secret Printing 924 273 Seizing a Line Features 50 Seizing a Line Features OVERVIEW 50 SLT Caller ID 628 262 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number 151 222 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type 150 221 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern 629 262 SLT Hold Mode 104 214 SLT Message Waiting 619 259 SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 220 Feature Guide 293 Index SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call 627 261 SLT Ring Silence Ratio 142 220 Account Code 805 268 SMDR Language 806 268 SMDR Mode for Printing 929 274 SMDR Parameter 801 267 RS 232C Parameter 800 266 gt Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 152 SMS Centre Number for Receiving 145 221 SMS Routing Table CO 146 221 SMS Routing Table Extension 147 221 SMS gt Short Message Service SMS 132 Speed Dialling Personal System 59 Station Feature Clear gt Extension Feature Clear 167 Station Hunting Idle Extension Hunting 23 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 152 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 152 Station Programme Clear gt Extension Feature Clear 167 Station Speed Dialling gt Personal Speed Dialling 59 System Configuration and Administration Features 171 System Configuration Hardware 172 System Configuration Software 173 System Data Clear 999 276 System Data Control 182 System Data Dump 8
233. ndicates how many bits compose each character d Parity Bit Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer e Stop Bit Length Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer The codes for Dial number will be abbreviated as shown below if all of the following conditions are met an optional Caller ID card is installed With CID is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format 906 With Charge is selected in Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922 Abbreviation of codes incoming lt l gt DISA incoming lt DI gt BV incoming lt gt DIL incoming lt LI gt UCD waiting lt UW gt If the charge of a call exceeds 7 digits considering that the decimal point does not move all numbers will be replaced by nines e g 99999 99 Before changing the decimal point position Decimal Places 190 output or clear all SMDR data Otherwise the charge value for the accumulated data will be displayed incorrectly Installation Manual References 2 8 1 Connecting Peripherals 4 1 5 System Reset with System Data Clear Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features 1 20 1 2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension Descripti
234. nen nennen nnn enne enne 266 SMDR Parameter BON PRETI OEIL E TIT 267 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 802 seeeneeeeeenennennn eene 267 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression 803 sssssssssseeeeeneeneennee nennen nennen nenne 267 System Data Dump 804 ssssssesssssseseseeeneenn nennen nennen nennen nnet resins e rrn etr nennen trennen enne 268 SMDR Account Code 805 5 8 3 cede nln ice ahi ee Oa Me el Rees dette 268 e n Ib e dirae toas MM 268 BV Total Recording Time 807 ok eee derit ceu deiode ope eo eters 269 BV Card Initialisation 8081 02 2 2 1 2 0 21000000000 80 00 269 Galler pA o mr 269 Caller 270 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls 9021 000 nnne 270 Caller ID Modification for Long distance Calls 903 270 Caller ID Log Priority 9041 20 22 2 1 000000 00000000116 271 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition 9051 0 2 22 2 000 000000000 nnne nnnm nnns 271 Caller ID SMDR Format 906 ener nennen neret nnne tenen rre entente siters 271 GallerID SMBR Printout S07 deett sha ie ee eee 271 Common Are
235. nk you for calling Company A Press 1 to speak to Sales Press 2 to speak to Support 26 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features UCD Intercept Mode When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside CO line call within a preprogrammed length of time UCD Ring Time before Intercept 525 the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming UCD Intercept Mode 524 a Disconnect The call is disconnected If a UCD OGM is not played the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on hook b Intercept The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time period UCD Ring Time after Intercept 526 When the timer expires the call is disconnected If a UCD OGM is not played the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on hook Conditions To use this feature UCD must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 UCD OGM It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy UCD Waiting Message 527 The Log in or Log out status can be set for each extension 1 2 4 Log in Log out The last member of a group cannot log out FWD DND Mo
236. nother call without hanging up Flash Recall mode or to send an EFA External Feature Access signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access external features EFA mode HOLD Used to place a call on hold SP PHONE Used to select handset or hands free operation Speakerphone MONITOR Used to select hands free dialling and monitor operation MESSAGE Used to leave a message waiting indication call back the party who left a message waiting indication or play back voice messages This button is provided with an LED Light Emitting Diode except for on KX T7700 series telephones With KX T7700 series telephones the Message Ringer Lamp is lit when a message waiting indication is left at an extension REDIAL Used to redial the last number dialled TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party Flexible CO Used to access an outside CO line or outside CO line group when making or receiving a call The button s preprogrammed Outside CO Line Access method determines which line is selected Default Single CO S CO Can also be customised as a feature button INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls AUTO ANS Auto Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands free mode or to mute Answer MUTE the built in microphone during a conversation VOICE CALL Used to answer an intercom call automatically 136 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Function AUT
237. ns Class 5 exception Calls are restricted Calls are permitted TRS for System Speed Dialling TRS System Speed Dialling Class 301 Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension If for example the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers is assigned as 2 the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1 and 2 but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3 4 and 5 according to TRS as follows COS No System Speed Dialling Class 1 2 3 4 1 v 2 7 2 F 7 7 3 P 7 4 7 v v Permitted 66 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features Flowchart An extension user tries to make an outside CO line call Was the number dialled using System Speed Dialling Is the COS number higher than the System Speed Dialling Class No or Equal COS 1 What is the COS number Y COSs 2 5 Is the dialled number found in an applicable Denied Code Table Is the dialled number found in an applicable Exception Code Table Y The call is denied The call is permitted The user hears a reorder tone Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly establ
238. nt 152 1 inicie iE 222 Incoming Reverse 153 0 222 CO BUSY OUT 194 eL 222 CO Busy Out Check Time 155 aiii ii eire terno etie ipd eco eter easet sedes pnto tasa 222 Call Charge Calculation Registering Leading Numbers 161 enne 223 Call Charge Calculation Time Table 1 2 3 4 1162 169 176 183 223 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 163 170 177 184 223 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 164 171 178 185 224 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 165 172 179 186 224 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 166 173 180 187 224 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Flat Charge and Duration 167 174 181 188 225 Feature Guide 9 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Unit Charge and Duration 168 175 182 189 225 Decimal Places 190 utei cete 225 Hold Recall Time 000 244 222 0 0 0110000000 1
239. nversion 119 sse nennen 218 Bell Frequency 120 PEEERE P 218 Automatic Line Access 121 uec i nncthenassyesanied 218 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access 122 sse nennen nennen 218 Break Ratio 123 3 5 a n EE Rd Eee e igi PUER 218 TRS Check for and 125 219 DSS Off hook Mode 126 1 ih dt ide inet erit 219 PICKUD GROUP e 219 Ringback Tone Pattern 126 2 1 td eei ee I es 219 ASO irene s ar E 220 SLT Ring Silence Ratio 1421 4 4 4 0000 enne nnne nnne nnne tnn nenne nnnm entente 220 SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 220 SMS Centre Number for Receiving 145 221 SMS Routing Table CO 146 221 SMS Routing Table Extension 147 nennen enne nnne nnns 221 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type 150 nennen nennen nnns 221 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number 151 sse 222 Automatic Time Adjustme
240. od for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 Call Transfer Using a telephone call an extension user such as the operator to request to be transferred to the internal modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer Conditions Only one system programming session is permitted at a time Access will be denied to a second party who tries to perform system programming including system programming via a PT System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode System Password To access system programming in interactive mode a valid password must be entered The password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming System Password 002 A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a PC If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system programming data upload from a PC to the PBX the successfully transferred portion of the data can still be used Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on site programming using the Serial Interface RS 232C port or USB port Installation Manual References 3 2 1 Connection 3 2 3 Accessing PBX via Internal Modem Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Direct In Line DIL Feature Guide 183 2 3 System Data Control 3 2 PC Programming 184 Feature Guide
241. omatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX One is the personal area which stores logs of calls received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone PT The other is the common area which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing feature Caller ID information can be logged by the following methods Logged automatically when no one answers calls Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller s information when answering calls Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation Logged automatically when a caller leaves a voice message gt 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Example If the information is stored in record 002 002 JOHN WHITE Caller s name 002 0011223344 1 Caller s number 002 15 10 23a Date and time of call New 002 Old 001 Status amp number of logged calls Caller ID Selection buttons CL Personal CL Common Caller ID Indication buttons CL Personal CL Common NZ NZ NZ New is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed old is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed Both new an
242. on Calls can also be logged according to which extension they were made from and printed out An extension assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager programming a Call Log Print Out and Clear for Each Extension b All Clear Example The manager can print out call logs for each extension Up to 500 outgoing outside CO line calls can be logged in the PBX If the memory becomes full the oldest call will be overwritten each time a call is received Calls stored since the manager cleared the call log for an extension can be printed out 103 Tony Viola ii 1 1 Starting Date Dec 29 05 07 00PM Present Date Dec 31 05 09 00PM Date Time Ext CO Dial number Duration Charge Code 12 31 05 12 52PM 103 03 123456789012345678901234 00 00 16 0 04 EUR 12 31 05 1 04PM 103 01 092 1438 00 00 06 0 02 EUR 4536 12 31 05 1 06PM 103 01 092123456789 00 00 08 0 02EUR 12 31 05 1 07PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 13 12 31 05 2 15PM 103 01 0921234567 00 11 00 0 55 EUR 101 12 31 05 2 26PM 103 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 0 15 EUR 101 Total 1 33 EUR 2 1 Starting Date shows the start date Month Day Year of the call log indicates that there may be overwritten calls that are not shown on the print out In this case the total of the shown call charges may be different from the actual total charge The total charge under the line is the correct one The date for
243. on 400 This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside CO lines that are not connected User Manual References 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 51 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 3 Description Outside CO Line Access There are 3 methods of accessing an outside CO line Method Description Operation Automatic Line Access Local Access Selects an idle outside CO line automatically from the assigned outside CO lines Automatic Designated Line Access 419 If Idle Line Preference 1 5 3 2 Line Preference Outgoing is set on the extension through personal programming the user can access an idle line simply by going off hook Dial the Automatic Line Access number 9 0 Automatic Line Access 121 Note For New Zealand the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9 Outside CO Line Group Access Selects an idle outside CO line from the corresponding outside CO line group Dial the Outside CO Line Group Access number and an outside CO line group number or press a Group CO G CO button S CO Line Access Selects the desired outside CO line directly Press the Single CO S CO button Line Access Using the Other CO O CO Button To select an idle outside CO line from among the outside CO lines that are not assigned to S CO or G CO buttons
244. on is complete Modification is complete Modified number is logged Modified number is logged 4 Displaying the Caller s Name When a call containing Caller ID information is received the PBX will search for the caller s name in the following order then show that name on the display 1 The System Speed Dialling Table 2 The Caller ID information received from the telephone company If a caller s name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company it will not be displayed Conditions General Hardware Requirement An optional Caller ID card Caller ID Display on SLT Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to Intercom calls and outside CO line calls Intercom calls include forwarded calls calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall Outside CO line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution UCD or Direct Inward System 124 Feature Guide 1 16 Caller ID Features Access DISA ring groups forwarded calls intercepted calls or calls from extensions that placed outside CO line calls on consultation hold e SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming SLT Caller ID Signalling Type 150 e Each SLT including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming SLT Caller ID 628 e When the caller s telephone number is sent to an SLT an Outside CO Line Access number
245. only Czech Republic only New Zealand only Feature Guide 281 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Reorder Tones The outside CO line you tried impe to seize is not assigned or was denied Ringback Tones Single 3 s interval Double 3 s interval Single 5 s interval Double 5 s interval DND Tone The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls Call Waiting Tone 1 282 Feature Guide nnnnnnnnnnn Brazil only Czech Republic only nni nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Malaysia only 1s 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Call Waiting Tone 2 4s C Single a Double Iis Triple Iis i nnn nan Hold Alarm Tone i 15s A call has been on hold for longer than the specified time 11 p VEEE m Warning Tone Outside is CO Line Call Limitation This tone is sent 15 seconds EN before the specified time for i i disconnection Confirmation Tone 1 1s The feature was set successfully or the Extension Lock feature was set Or numum BEE see d 1 cancelled Confirmation Tone 2 The new feature setting was the same as the previous setting or certain features zu einen 4 TIPPS i F 4 TIPP
246. ook of an outgoing outside CO line call The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR using this feature 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection Conditions e f Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside CO line Polarity Reverse Detection 424 the PBX will start the call duration counter Call Duration Counter Start 204 immediately after the outside party answers the call Feature Guide 45 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 6 Busy Out Description The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through outside CO lines preventing users from seizing lines where a loop current is not detected When loop currents are not detected outside CO lines are set to Busy Out status and cannot be used to make calls gt CO Busy Out 154 An outside CO line in Busy Out status cannot be selected for making a call by Automatic Line Access or Outside CO Line Group Access or by using the Other CO O CO button If a user tries to seize an outside CO line set to Busy Out status the user will hear a reorder tone and a message is shown on the display of the Proprietary Telephone PT This is useful if some or all outside CO lines are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the external telecommunications environment Conditions e Loop current detection is performed on active outside CO lines whenever the line is seized
247. or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals the PBX selects an outside CO line type according to the following priority Pulse High Pulse Low Installation Manual References 4 1 5 System Reset with System Data Clear Feature Guide References 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection Feature Guide 193 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 6 Country Setting Description The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming Country 995 The PBX will restart with the default settings of the user s country area During this operation communication between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time Country Setting can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software Quick Setup For more information about Quick Setup refer to the Installation Manual 3 2 2 Starting KX TEA308 Maintenance Console for the first time Conditions e This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is NE or CE 194 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 37 Firmware Upgrade Description It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface RS 232C port or USB port using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software Even if a user upgrades the PBX software the system data will not be lost For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software refer to the on line help Conditions R
248. oring a Room Room Monitor Feature Guide 81 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 3 Microphone Mute Description During a conversation a proprietary telephone PT user can disable the built in microphone to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built in speaker When Microphone Mute is active the user can hear the other party s voice but the user s voice is muted Conditions e This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS MUTE button User Manual References 1 4 6 Muting a Microphone Microphone Mute 82 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 4 Headset Operation Description This PBX supports headset compatible proprietary telephones PTs A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset by using an optional headset For connection and operation refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset This feature is also known as Handset Headset Selection Conditions Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature 1 6 1 4 Redial Tosetheadset mode on a PT use the handset headset selector located on the telephone and or on the headset f headset mode is on pressing the SP PHONE button activates the headset not the built in speaker User Manual References 1 4 7 Using the Headset Headset Operation Feature Guide 83 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 5 Data Line Security Description
249. ort Message Service SMS centre the PBX can route incoming calls to specific single line telephones SLTs that support SMS according to a preprogrammed set of rules SMS Routing Table Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN access If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company s Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS centre call from the registered SMS centre number the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT In all other cases incoming outside CO line calls will be directed according to system programming CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so they will know how to handle those calls To programme SLTs refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the SLTs Notes Thisfeature complies with the following ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute specifications ETSI ES 201 912 Thisfeature is available only for SLTs that support SMS SMS service depends on the contract with your telephone company Programming Example SMS Routing Table with Sub address Numbers When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is 1112224444 and the telephone numbers of each outside CO line are 3847001 for CO 1 2 and 3847002 for CO 3 programme as follows 1 PBX setting SMS Centre Number for Receiving
250. page break is inserted after each extension s call log printout SMDR Mode for Printing 929 9 2 9 atone ein MODE 1 MODE 2 Note Even if On outgoing incoming call or Toll outgoing call is selected in Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 802 when MODE 2 is selected in this programme the call log information is not displayed by SMDR but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 20 1 2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension Call Forwarding Selection te em continue 9 8 3 Ce ser e 08 X Disable To continue 274 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Note This programme also functions for outside CO line calls via the DISA Intercept Routing feature and when DISA calls are received by a DISA ring group Feature amp Programming References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 TRS Check after Answering 966 OIG tese Enable Disable Note This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not TRS Check Time after Answering 967 DOO 5 10 15 2290100 5 Note This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when Enable is selected in TRS Check after Answering 966 K
251. peed Dialling System Speed Dialling and Quick Dialling do not function e This feature is not available when the KX T7710 is connected in parallel with a Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Hunting Group Set 100 Gene ee uS To continue 1 0 9 e ese Disable To continue e e Feature amp Programming References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Group 600 Hunting Type 101 To continue Gore e 8 Terminate Circular To continue Note This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set 100 Feature Guide 213 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting DTMF Integration Port 1 en continue 1 9 2 eese ens 03 04 X Disable To continue uar Feature amp Programming References 1 19 2 Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration DTMF Integration 103 ED CCS MUCH Enable Disable Note When a KX TVM KX TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX to enable Inband DTMF Integration between the VPS and the PBX select Plan 1 or Plan 2 in Extension Number 009 and Enable in this programme Feature amp Programming References 1 19 2 Voice Mail Inband DTMF Integration DTMF Integration Port 102 SLT Hold Mode 104 1 9 4 mer crore Hold 1 Hold 2
252. permitted Up to 80 exception codes each consisting of up to 11 digits can be stored The available number of codes depends on the COS assigned to each extension Applicable tables by COS The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below COS No Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables 1 No restriction No restriction Not Programmable Not Programmable 20 denied codes programmed in 302 80 exception codes code numbers 01 80 2 Table for Class 2 programmed in 306 Tables for Classes 2 through 5 40 denied codes programmed in 302 and 60 exceptions codes code numbers 01 60 3 303 programmed in 306 Tables for Classes 2 and 3 Tables for Classes 3 through 5 60 denied codes programmed in 302 40 exception codes code numbers 01 40 4 through 304 programmed in 306 Tables for Classes 2 through 4 Tables for Classes 4 and 5 80 denied codes programmed in 302 20 exception codes code numbers 01 20 5 through 305 programmed in 306 Tables for Classes 2 through 5 Table for Class 5 Feature Guide 65 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features COS 1 All outside CO line calls permitted COS 2 Class 2 restriction Class 2 5 exceptions COS 3 Class 2 3 restrictions Class 3 5 exceptions COS 4 Class 2 4 restrictions Class 4 5 exceptions COS 5 Class 2 5 restrictio
253. play proprietary telephone PT can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving calls Display Item Display Example Conditions The extension number name of the 101 Tom Smith Extension numbers and names calling or called extension are programmable Extension Number 009 Extension Name 604 If an extension name is not stored only the extension number will be displayed The status of the called extension 101 Busy The name and number of the doorphone DoorPhone 1 The telephone number dialled 1234567890 The extension number and name of the 102 Mike calling extension after the call is forwarded The received call information The first line message can be a Caller s name ABC Company either a or b at each extension through system programming b Caller s number 12345678 Caller ID Log Priority 904 C Outside CO line number Call on CO 1 The call charge of the current outside CO1 12 35 EUR The charge of a call is displayed CO line call when Call Charge Calculation is enabled through system programming Call Charge Calculation 441 Settings such as the call charge rate decimal point position and currency can be assigned through system programming 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation The duration of the current outside CO 1 0 01 15 The display remains for 5 line call seconds after the call is finished The outgoing outsi
254. played DISA for DISA distribution and the common BV OGM to be played BV21 for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM When the destination does not answer the DISA call the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area Anextension user can set incoming calls to be forwarded to his or her personal message area when he or she cannot answer them If an incoming call direct to the user s extension or a call using the DISA AA service CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 is forwarded to the user s personal message area the caller will hear a personal BV OGM and can leave a voice message Direct Message feature An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the personal message area of another extension even if the extension has not been set to forward incoming calls to its personal message area or even if no personal BV OGM has been recorded When a caller leaves a voice message using this feature the voice message is automatically linked to the caller information including the extension number and name if stored in the Incoming Call Log e Anextension user can play and or erase voice messages from the user s extension In addition a user or the operator manager can remotely play and or erase voice messages through
255. ption Code 355 358 3 ARS Modification Removed Digits 360 4 ARS Modification Added Number 361 5 ARS CO Line Group 364 In this example Dialled Number Modified Number Description 9 43 425 9477 050 43 425 9477 A long distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to 9 9 54 123 4567 050 54 123 4567 A long distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to 9 9 93 425 9477 050 93 425 9477 A long distance call via outside CO line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2 9 04 123 4567 050 04 123 4567 A long distance call via outside CO line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2 9 07 81 92 477 1450 050 00 81 92 477 1450 An international call via outside CO line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 3 9 6 123456 6 123456 A mobile telephone call via outside CO line group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4 Authorisation Code amp Itemised Billing Code Table Authorisation Code Route 1 4 Authorisation Code 381 384 An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside CO line if required by the carrier The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone PT displays or System Data Dump printouts System Data Dump 804 after programming but Already Set will be shown instead ltemised Billing Code Ite
256. r Intercept expires Y The call is The call is not established answered vy The call is disconnected Feature Guide 113 1 15 Optional Device Features 114 Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside to Outside CO to CO Line Call feature of DISA The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a b c d Enabling DISA security Trunk Security or All Security Maintaining the secrecy of passwords Selecting passwords that are complex and random so that they cannot be easily guessed Changing passwords regularly The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes The preinstalled DISA UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the total recording time of the PBX for DISA UCD OGMs is 3 minutes To use this feature DISA must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside CO line port gt CO Line Mode Day Night Lunch 414 416 DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time DISA Delayed Answer Time 504 so that the caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM ora short beep Call Forwarding FWD to Outside CO Line When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party the caller is not required to enter a DIS
257. r Redial for an SLT or 80 or 80 Live Call Screening LCS Password set 77 000 999 2 times cancel one time Log in Log out 736 0 1 0 Logging of Caller ID Information in the 738 2 0 0 Common Area set cancel Logging of Caller ID Information in the 738 1 0 0 Personal Area set cancel Message Waiting leave cancel for a caller 70 1 2 extn no 0 Message Waiting cancel all for a called 70 O 80 extension Message Waiting cancel all for another 70 3 extn no extension Message Waiting Answer 784 0 Message Waiting for Another Extension 70 4000 9999 2 times Lock set cancel one time 0 Operator Call 0 9 Outside CO Line Group Access 8 1 3 outside phone no Paging All Extensions amp External 33 33 or 9 Paging All Extensions Group 33 33 0 1 8 Paging External 34 34 Paging Answer 43 43 Paging Deny set cancel 734 1 0 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Numbering Feature Additional Number Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 Personal BV OGM record play erase 723 1 2 0 0 Personal Speed Dialling confirm 3x 0 9 Personal Speed Dialling dial 1 1 or 0 9 Personal Speed Dialling programme 2x 0 9 phone no Remote Maintenance 729 Remote Timed Reminder set cancel 764 extn no 76 confirm hhmm parameter 5 2 3
258. r SMDR 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature logs the 4 digit account code or the 2 digit index of the account code when an extension user makes a call using this feature gt SMDR Account Code 805 It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature 1 8 5 Walking COS Feature Guide References 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry 70 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 9 3 Budget Management Description Limits telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension Budget Management 925 If the total of call charges reaches the limit the extension user cannot make further outside CO line calls An extension assigned as the manager can increase the limit or clear the previous call charges through manager programming Conditions Budget Limit Selection The method of limiting calls can be selected through system programming Budget Limit Selection 926 a Enable Disconnect the call after the beeps 3 sets of 3 beeps will be heard before an outside CO line call is disconnected due to budget limitation The first set of beeps will be heard when the call reaches the last 3 units of remaining time The call is disconnected as soon as the budget limit is reached at the start of the final unit of time b Disable From the next call The current call is not disconnected but other outside CO line calls cannot be made once the call has finished
259. ramming determines the single line telephones SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension SLT Message Waiting 619 If a user goes off hook with an SLT that has messages waiting a special dial tone dial tone 3 will be heard The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number Message for Another Extension Button A flexible CO Direct Station Selection DSS button can be customised as a Message for Another Extension button This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming gt Message Waiting for Another Extension 618 to access messages except Built in Voice Message BV messages left for another extension or voice messages stored in another extension s VPS mailbox Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension The operator or manager can override this lock to unlock it Extension Lock CANCEL ALL Even while this lock is on the user can view call back or clear message waiting indications left at his or her own extension Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left Feature Guide 129 1 17 Message Features 130 Message waiting indications are always left on the
260. rcom calls outside CO line calls and doorphone calls Anextension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks the call with the Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming Call Pickup Tone 117 Calls from Hold Recall and Camp on Recall cannot be picked up with the Directed Group Call Pickup feature Group Call Pickup Bysetting system programming Pickup Group 127 in advance an extension user can pick up a call to another extension in the same extension group simply by going off hook even if his or her extension is not ringing User Manual References 1 3 8 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Feature Guide 37 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Description A user with a speakerphone equipped proprietary telephone PT can answer intercom calls automatically without lifting the handset When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands free Answerback mode the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone Then the conversation is automatically established Conditions Hands free Answerback applies to Intercom calls not including outside CO line calls or doorphone calls When an intercom call outside CO line call is transferred to an extension this feature is overridden and a ring tone is heard Feature Guide Reference
261. rdless of the restrictions imposed on the extension 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency mode if necessary 1 5 2 4 Dial Type Selection Pause Insertion A dialling pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button or can be automatically inserted after a user dialled code such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic Pause Insertion code The length of the pause can be specified through system programming 1 5 2 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Feature Guide 41 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 2 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers Emergency Number 309 after seizing an outside CO line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions e Ifthe PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access code after the Outside CO Line Access number This feature will function even when n Account Code Verify All Verify Toll Forced mode 1 5 2 3 Account Code Entry Restricted by the current class of service COS 1 8 1 Toll Restr
262. rences 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Busy Mode 506 To select Disconnect or Call Waiting i5 o e aes ise Disconnect a Waiting lt To select DISA gt DOO wx E DISA Feature amp Programming References 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM for DISA UCD 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Mode 507 57 9 7 Gu em we Intercept Disconnect Feature Guide 247 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 19 Voice Mail Features DISA Ring Time before Intercept 508 DTA Qe me 10 20 30 D 120 s Feature amp Programming References 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Mode 507 DISA Ring Time after Intercept 509 Je esse denne ess 10 20 30 Aveo 20 s Feature amp Programming References 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Mode 507 DISA Ring Time before Intercept 508 DISA No Dial Mode 510 JUA Buen ose Intercept Disconnect Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Security Mode 511 JW euer ferons enn Trunk All Security Note Trunk Security Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code as
263. ressed PBX supports years from 2000 to 2099 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature System Speed Dialling Number 001 continue D00 Cer mmm aa e 00 99 Max 32 digits 0 9 X P F To continue Feature Guide 207 3 3 PT Programming 208 Notes An Outside CO Line Access number 9 0 for New Zealand 1 or 9 81 through 83 should be included before the phone number When dialling a pause will automatically be inserted after the Outside CO Line Access number When storing an account code assigned in Account Code 310 enter lt and the account code after an Outside CO Line Access number Feature amp Programming References 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features System Password 002 DOG Geox e ss 4 7 digits 0000 9990999 1234 WARNING To maintain system security a password is required to perform system programming To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling do not disclose the password Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password 1 2 m Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling maintain the secrecy of the password We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of sy
264. ring PC programming However as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file do not allow unauthorised access to these files Note This PBX has only one system password It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming For this reason the password can consist of numerals only 200 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 4 Installing and Starting KX TEA308 Maintenance Console To programme and administer the PBX by PC Personal Computer you need to install KX TEA308 Maintenance Console onto the PC To install and start KX TEA308 Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected refer to the Installation Manual 3 1 1 Installing KX TEA308 Maintenance Console on a PC KX TEA308 Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically System Requirements Required Operating System e Microsoft Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows Minimum Hardware Requirements e CPU 300 MHz Intel Celeron microprocessor e HDD 100 MB of available hard disk space e 128 MB of available RAM Feature Guide 201 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Required Telephone PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone PT with a display such as the KX T7730 An authorised administrator or the manager extensio
265. rmation is checked the PBX can automatically modify the caller s telephone number according to a preprogrammed set of rules Caller ID Modification Table This modified number allows the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside CO Line Access numbers area codes etc Programming Example Caller ID Modification Table Removed No of Call Type Code No Area Code Digits Added No Local Call 1 212 3 Not Stored 2 011 3 001 Cont 5 Long distance Call 3 Not programmable 0 1 1 _s Caller ID Area Code 901 2 s Caller ID Modification for Local Calls 902 3 s Caller ID Modification for Long distance Calls 903 Feature Guide 123 1 16 Caller ID Features Modification Flowchart gt An outside CO line call containing Caller ID information is received Is the caller s area code stored in the Caller ID Modification Table Modifies the number according to the Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the corresponding method programmed in the Long distance Local Call field Call field Example Example Removed number of digits 3 Removed number of digits 0 Added number blank Added number 1 Example Example Received number 201 555 1234 Received number 313 555 1234 7 7 Modified number 555 1234 Modified number 1 313 555 1234 Modificati
266. rogramming it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route Selection ARS Account Code Entry Verify Toll mode only feature ARS Dial Tone 362 Feature Guide References 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 169 1 22 Audible Tone Features 1 22 2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of a feature operation the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user Type Description Tone 1 Sent when the setting is accepted or sent when the Extension Lock feature is set or cancelled Tone 2 Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one or sent when certain features are successfully performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy Tone 3 Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features Call Pickup Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number e Conference Paging Paging Answer Conditions e possible to eliminate confirmation tone except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number through system programming gt Call Pickup Tone 117 Conference Tone 105 External Pager Access Tone 106 Feature Guide References 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones 170 Feature Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 171 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 21 System Configuration Hardware 2 1 1 Extension
267. rs an unrecognised input the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 Intercept If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Routing No Ring Time before Intercept 508 UCD Ring Time before Intercept 525 the call is Answer IRNA redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 Feature Guide References 1 2 2 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV Feature Guide 15 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 Internal Call Features Description There are 2 types of internal calls described below Feature Description Details in Intercom Call A call from one extension to another 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call Doorphone Call A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination 1 15 1 for the current time service mode assigned to the doorphone s Doorphone Call port 2 2 3 Time Service 16 Feature Guide 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 Description 1 1 Incoming Call Features Incoming Call Indication Features Incoming Call Indication Features OVERVIEW Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways
268. s 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call User Manual References 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback 38 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Intercom Call Features 1 5 1 1 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user Conditions Extension Number Name Assignment Extension numbers Extension Number 009 and names Extension Name 604 Extension Name in Cyrillic 616 can be assigned to all extensions During intercom calls the number name of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones PTs DSS Button It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection DSS button gt DSS Off hook Mode 126 A flexible CO DSS MESSAGE button can be customised as a DSS button The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming Alternate Receiving Ring Voice If a user selects voice calling the calling party can talk to the user immediately after hearing a confirmation tone Alternate Calling Ring Voice A caller can change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice By doing so ring calling is switched to voice calling or vice versa at the called party This setting is active for the current call only
269. s ARS related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers 74 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Flowchart A long distance call is made S another one digit dialled within the ARS Inter digit Time No ia Each time a digit is dialled the PBX checks the dialled number other than Host PBX Access codes Carrier Exception codes and First Carrier Access code Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code Yes The dialled number is sent to the telephone company Is the dialled number an Emergency Call number Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code Does the dialled number include the First Carrier Access code Yes The dialled number other than the First Carrier Access code is sent to the telephone company Checks the Routing Plan Table 1 4 to determine which carrier to use 3 4 No Digits are removed gt from the dialled number as required Yes 5 Digits are added to the dialled number as required tos The corresponding No Routing Plan Table Yes j is selected Goes to Does the leading number match the Route 1 4 Exception Code Does the leading number match the Route 1 4 Selection Code Are 7 digits other than Host PBX Access cod
270. s of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference User Manual References The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their proprietary telephones PTs single line telephones SLTs and Direct Station Selection DSS Consoles Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference PT Programming References Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT 2 3 2 PT Programming These PT programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme number The following is an example of a PT Programming reference Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type Hunting Type 101 Links to Other Pages and Manuals If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature Guide and other PBX manuals Click on a link to jump to that section Linked items include Installation Manual References Feature Guide References Feature Guide User Manual References PT Programming References Notes Certain PTs features and optional service cards are not available in some areas Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software 2 3 1 PC Programming For progra
271. s performed 1 Ifthe assigned DISA OGM busy message has been recorded the caller hears the DISA OGM e g The party you called is unavailable If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected 2 After the busy message has been played the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy message is sent to the caller again 3 PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination In this case the PBX does not accept any Outside CO Line Access number regardless of the security type If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call The PBX regards it as unanswered DISA Intercept Mode If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Ring Time before Intercept 508 the call will be handled in one of the following ways according to system programming DISA Intercept Mode 507 a Disconnect The call is disconnected b Intercept The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority DISA IRNA to BV Day Night Lunch 438 440 Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 This is useful for business calls For example the call can be forwarded to the operator a Voice Processing System VPS or Built in Voice Message BV automatically DISA No Dial Mode If the PBX does not receive either DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals or
272. s selected in DTMF Integration 103 Feature amp Programming References 1 19 1 Voice Mail APT Integration SLT Ring Silence Ratio 142 US user 2226625 cei 1 2 1 3 1 4 On Off Note This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT a set of bell on and bell off Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 SLT Ring Bell on Time 143 1 4 13 eer 1000 2000 ms 00 ms increments This programme selects the length of the bell on signal of an SLT This determines the ring tone pattern for incoming calls to SLTs combined with the setting in SLT Ring Silence Ratio 142 This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number when DTMF1 or DTMF2 is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type 150 Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1 16 1 Caller ID Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming SMS Centre Number for Receiving 145 000 SES Qe Max 16 digits 0 9 X Feature amp Programming References 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support SMS Routing Table CO em Ner cc To continue gaga suas on s A To continue Bb Feature amp Programming References 1 17 3 Fixed Line SMS Terminal Support SMS Routing Table Extension mais We ee ae To continue OOO mon
273. s the number of the extension that was engaged in the call Also shows the following codes xxxB Call answered by the BV feature 1 15 7 Built in Voice Message BV xxx Number of the extension to which the call was directed before the BV feature answered Even if a caller does not leave a voice message for example by going on hook while hearing a personal common BV outgoing message OGM the information is logged C xx Outside to Outside CO to CO line call via the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA xx Outside CO line number that receives the DISA call 4 co Shows the outside CO line number used for the call Feature Guide 1 20 Administrative Information Features Section Number Data Description 5 Dial number Outside CO Line Call Outgoing Outside CO Line Call Shows the dialled telephone number Digits shown are as follows 0 through 9 x hyphen F Flash recall signal 1 10 6 Flash Recall z Host PBX Access code marker 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX The marker is displayed between the Host PBX Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access code is entered dot Secret Dialling Incoming Outside CO Line Call Shows lt incoming gt the caller s telephone number max 16 digits A caller s telephone number is displayed only when an optio
274. s to an idle member of the same extension group if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming UCD Group 520 Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order The UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions Example of UCD Group The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived Calls arrive at the UCD group Y Queuing When the destination extension is busy Call Distribution O or is logged out the call waits in the Calls are distributed in queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the the numerical order of 5 caller e gt gt D Extn A UCD starts When the second call receives the searching arrives at extn B the first call from extn B third call will be Skips extn A directed to extn C Feature Guide 25 1 2 Receiving Group Features Flowchart A UCD call from an outside party is received Y The call reaches the UCD group Busy Y Rings when an extension is available mp Y UCD OGM UCD Ring Time before Intercept expires Music on Hold is sent to the caller The call is The call is not Rings when an established answered Busy
275. s to one extension group in Extension Group 600 2 Assign Enable to the group in Hunting Group Set 100 3 Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type 101 VM Service 1 Accessing a Mailbox The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed Follow on ID Listening to Recorded Messages After the VPS records a message it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended to indicate that there is a new message 1 17 1 Message Waiting proprietary telephone PT user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access When the button is pressed the PBX calls the voice mail extension then sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension s mailbox number A single line telephone SLT user hears a special dial tone dial tone 3 when going off hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number Conditions A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features 150 Feature Guide 1 19 Voice Mail Features FWD AII Calls FWD Busy No Answer DISA Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 1 1 1 2 Intercept Routing 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA For these features the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because t
276. selecting another parking zone User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call 94 Feature Guide 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 3 Call Splitting Description An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties Placing the current call on hold allows the user to speak with the other party Conditions This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements e Consultation Hold When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone PT or the Recall hookswitch on a single line telephone SLT the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold 1 12 5 Consultation Hold User Manual References 1 4 3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately Call Splitting Feature Guide 95 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 4 Music on Hold Description An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold The following types of audio are available depending on the user s country area a Internal audio source b External audio source C Tone The audio sources internal and external can also be used for BGM 1 15 4 Background Music BGM Conditions Hardware requirement A user supplied audio device such as a CD player or radio for External audio source audio can be selected through system programming Music on Hold 111 e Operations such as Call Hold 1 12 1 Call Hold and Call Transfer 1 11 1 Call Transfer acti
277. sers that can use this feature BV for Extension 622 If a voice message channel resource is in use when an outside caller tries to leave a voice message he or she will hear a ringback tone The caller will hear a personal common BV OGM as soon as a channel becomes available Up to 3 outside CO line calls can be placed in a queue as they arrive If a user performs System Data Clear by selecting All para through system programming System Data Clear 999 all voice messages except for personal common BV OGMs are erased To erase all voice messages and personal common BV OGMs at once initialise the voice message card through system programming BV Card Initialisation 808 Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID Indication Personal button or a Caller ID Indication Common button a caller can leave a voice message in that personal common message area and the Caller ID information including associated voice messages will be logged When the remaining recording time for the PBX is less than 5 minutes the display informs both the extension users within the same resource and the manager that the voice message resource is full and the users will hear a special dial tone dial tone 5 when going off hook If the remaining recording time goes back to being 5 minutes or more for example when messages are erased the display returns to the idle status display and the users will hear another dial tone instead of d
278. sesessseseeee nennen nnne nnne tnmen nennen nnns 51 1 5 3 3 Outside CO Line ACCESS iz uoce iic eim ctu ege ome Re ck asc pe o dpa ed deci gae daba ndn Syene 52 1 6 Memory Dialling Features iuiccii xao ninaxaxbx ink bui cada ci C ba xk OR CIE CE cab x EFL 0 EE Cx XXA ENEN NL NE NER 54 1 6 1 8 6 EDD D S T 54 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features OVERVIEW seeseeeseeeeeneennenneen neret nn nnne tnnt nnn ennr terret nnne neret 54 1612 Oneto ch Deal TUS REL 56 1 6 1 3 7710 One touch 57 61 4 uuu URINE SL eds 58 1 6 1 5 Speed 59 1 6 1 6 SICUT 60 6 Feature Guide 1 6 1 7 J 1 NN o amp amp o L d A 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 RED EC 111 N 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 13 1 18 1 1 13 1 2 A 14 1 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 o 16 1 16 2 J 17 1 POU
279. signed in DISA Security Code 512 before making an outside CO line call All Security Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside CO line or intercom call 248 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming No Security Allows the caller to make either an outside CO line or intercom call without entering a DISA security code Feature amp Programming References 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Security Code 512 1 1 1 1 NEXT or PREV lt or Prev i To continue s 1 2 vex rone _eno o 2 To continue PR WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside to Outside CO to CO Line Call feature of DISA The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Enabling DISA security Trunk Security or All Security b Maintaining the secrecy of passwords C Selecting passwords that are complex and random so that they cannot be easily guessed d Changing passwords regularly Notes e This setting is required if Trunk Security or All Security is selected in DISA Security Mode 51 1 e Each DISA security code should be unique number of digits for DISA security codes is selected DISA Security Code Digits 530 Feature amp Programming References 1 15
280. stem security It is best to use a password of 7 digits Please change the password periodically If a system password is forgotten it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC and checking the password using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software If you do not have a backup of the system data you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it Therefore we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data For more information on how to back up the system data refer to the on line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming However as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file do not allow unauthorised access to these files Note This PBX has only one system password It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming For this reason the password can consist of numerals only Feature amp Programming References 2 3 1 PC Programming 2 3 2 PT Programming Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming DSS Console Jack Assignment 003 0 0 3 NEXT store 02 08 Disable To MN e delete disable an extension jack number press CLEAR in the extension jack number step e The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles Do not assign extension jack 01 manager extension as the DSS Console jack extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephon
281. store en 65 72 79 86 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s exc decimal point 65 Table 1 2 9 X um 72 Table 2 79 Table 3 86 Table 4 SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 166 173 180 187 To continue DAH gt EEE ses sv 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s 66 73 80 87 exc decimal point 55 Ti 5 0 9 X To _ 80 Table 3 87 Table 4 SELECT 224 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Flat Charge and Duration 167 174 181 188 To continue 310406 Ger 9 es 0 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s 67 74 81 88 exc decimal point 2 0 9 X To um 81 Table 3 88 Table 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Unit Charge and Duration 168 175 182 189 To continue gt eoe Coe store Leno 00 99 Max 7 digits 0 9999 s 68 75 82 89 exc decimal point BE Td 0 9 X To 82 Table 3 PNE 89 Table 4 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation Decimal Places 190 gog 0 6 Feature amp Programming References 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature 1 20 2 Call Charge
282. swerback A user s own extension single line telephone SLT Receiving Calls A user can answer an incoming call simply by going off hook Another extension Call Pickup A user can pick up a call to a specific extension a call within the user s extension group or a call received by a Telephone Answering Machine TAM extension 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Feature Guide 35 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 2 36 Description Line Preference Incoming A proprietary telephone PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following 3 line preferences Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming Line Preference Incoming Type Description No Line Auser can select a line by pressing the desired Outside CO Line Access button to answer an incoming call after going off hook Prime Line A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button assigned as the Prime Line simply by going off hook Ringing Line default A user can answer a call ringing at one s own telephone simply by going off hook Conditions Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming calls disable through system programming Flexible Ringing Day Night Lunch 408 410 Delayed Ringing Day Night Lunch 411 413 A single line telephone SLT user can s
283. sy No Answer or the DND feature clears the status of the previous FWD mode or DND feature Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 30 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Description Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations There are 4 Call Forwarding FWD modes described below Mode Description All Calls All calls are forwarded to another extension Busy No Answer All calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user s line is busy or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time period Call Forwarding Start Time 202 To Outside CO Line All calls are forwarded to an outside party provided this feature is enabled for each extension through system programming Call Forwarding to CO Line 607 Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or her desk this feature can be set from the destination extension Forwarded to Extension me 1 Another Extension 2 Outside Party Incoming Intercom Calls Outside CO Line Calls E 3 VPS n 4 BV Available Destinations Destination Availability Extension proprietary telephone PT single line telephone SLT Automatic Line Access no Phone no Only available when FWD to Outsid
284. sy or There is No Answer 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting 3 1 2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 1 2 1 Receiving Group Features Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extension is busy Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same extension group if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system programming Hunting Group Set 100 Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type Hunting Type 101 This feature is also known as Station Hunting Type Description Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according to the numerical order of the jacks Incoming call Busy Busy Busy E Extn gt Extn gt Extn Numerical order gt Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks until reaching the extension that is connected to the highest numbered jack in the group Incoming call Highest Y numbered jack Busy Busy Extn Numerical order gt Conditions Idle Extension Hunting applies to Intercom calls and outside CO line calls directed to a
285. ter than the specified duration an EFA signal will be sent for the specified duration e This feature functions only if the FLASH RECALL button is set to MODE 2 Flash Recall mode Disconnect Time The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside CO line is programmable for each outside CO line gt Disconnect Time 422 e Pressing the FLASH RECALL button restarts the conversation duration outputs SMDR call record 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature and checks the Toll Restriction TRS class of service COS number again The notation F will be logged along with the new dial number on SMDR Feature Guide 85 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Description An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company such as Call Waiting An EFA External Feature Access signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company This feature is only available during outside CO line calls including Host PBX Access 1 5 2 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Conditions This feature functions only if the FLASH RECALL button is set to MODE 1 EFA mode 1 10 6 Flash Recall It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the EFA feature number when the current call is placed on consultation hold 1 12 5 Consultation Hold Flash Recall Time The length of an EFA signal can
286. termine how they will function during different times of day For example incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing System VPS at night extension users can be prohibited from making long distance calls during lunch time etc There are 3 time service modes day night and lunch The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table 1 Time Service Switching Mode The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table It is possible however to switch time service modes manually Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system programming Time Service Switching Mode 006 Switching Mode Description Condition Automatic The current time service mode will switch The current time service automatically to another time service mode at mode day night lunch the time assigned in the Time Table and can be and the switching mode switched manually by pressing the Day Night automatic manual can or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service be switched manually by feature number an extension assigned Manual The current time service mode will switch only when the Day Night or Lunch button is pressed or when the Time Service feature number is entered 2 Time Table A Ti
287. the administrator system password must be entered The system password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming System Password 002 The administrator can programme all system programming Manager Password To set the manager password it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension Password Set Once set the manager password can be used to access manager programming The manager can assign a password to each extension extension password Personal Programming Data Reset A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming Line Preference Incoming Outgoing Call Waiting Tone Type Selection etc to their default settings This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS MUTE button in the Hands free Answerback feature and the Room Monitor feature System Programming Data Reset The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings based on the following parameters System Data Clear 999 a All para All data b System para All data except for CO para Extn para and DSS para C CO para The data assigned for each outside CO line d Extn para The data assigned for each extension Feature Guide 185 2 3 System Data Control e DSS para The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection DSS buttons and Programmable Feature PF buttons on the DSS Console f Speed dial The System Speed
288. tings Using Programming Mode 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Features 1 8 5 Walking COS Description Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service COS to another extension allowing them to make calls as if from their own telephones This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee s telephone to make a call The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or her extension number and then makes the call The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a user are applied when using Walking COS Conditions e When making a call with Walking COS the extension number of the Walking COS user s extension is also logged by SMDR 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Walking COS 2 1 7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode Feature Guide 73 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 4 Automatic Route Selection ARS Description The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route carrier available at the time a long distance call is made on an outside CO line that has Automatic Route Selection ARS enabled In order to use ARS effectively variou
289. tion Many of these features are explained below For more information refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the Panasonic VPS 1 Automatic Configuration Quick Setup or DIP switch initialisation without a PC The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS Extension group 8 VPS 3 lt t Port 1 4 2 This example uses a Panasonic KX TVM50 KX TVP50 VPS which can be connected with 2 conductor wire to 2 extension jacks of the PBX PBX Programming Example Voice Mail Table APT Integration VM 1 APT Port Enable Port 03 amp 04 gt VM 1 APT Port 130 In this example When Port 03 amp 04 is selected for VPS extension jacks 03 and 04 are placed in extension group 8 automatically Extension Group 600 Also the idle extension hunting type is set as Circular gt Hunting Type 101 and the Voice Mail VM Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant AA Hunting Chain are automatically enabled in the extension group Hunting Group Set 100 Note When Disable is selected the other settings above are reset to their default values 2 AAService Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number i
290. tion 3 3 PT Programming An authorised administrator or the manager can perform system programming by entering 3 digit programming numbers with a PT Password Security To maintain system security a password is required to perform system programming When KX TEA308 Maintenance Console is started for the first time the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system password To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling do not disclose the password Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it becomes known to others 2 To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling maintain the secrecy of the password 3 We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons of system security It is best to use a password of 7 digits P Please change the password periodically If a system password is forgotten it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC and checking the password using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software If you do not have a backup of the system data you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it Therefore we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data For more information on how to back up the system data refer to the on line help that appears by selecting the Help menu du
291. to the extension that executed the BSS feature Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX you can also subscribe to your telephone company s Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company s lines This feature is available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party and a call is received from another outside party on the same outside CO line The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of the incoming outside CO line call that is waiting The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not flash this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company For details consult your telephone company Conditions Data Line Security When an extension user activates Data Line Security Call Waiting is turned off 1 10 5 Data Line Security Call Waiting Tone A proprietary telephone PT user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection Caller ID Information When an extension receives a call waiting tone the caller s information will flash on the display for 5 seconds at 15 second intervals Feature Guide References 1 7 3 Call Waiting Tone 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Party is Bu
292. ton Conditions e One touch Dialling Button A flexible CO Direct Station Selection DSS Programmable Feature PF MESSAGE button can be customised as a One touch Dialling button Anumber consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it as 2 separate One touch Dialling buttons In this case the Outside CO Line Access number should be stored in the first button e Speed Dialling One touch Dialling and manual dialling can be used in combination e Personal Speed Dialling numbers 0 through 9 correspond to the numbers F1 through F10 of the PF buttons assigned as One touch Dialling numbers Assigning a One touch Dialling number to PF button F1 will override Personal Speed Dialling number 0 and vice versa Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 56 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Description The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One touch buttons on the KX T7710 single line telephone SLT can be customised to dial an extension number telephone number or feature number up to 24 digits when the user presses that button To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions every KX T7710 connected to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once through system programming KX T7710 One touch Dialling 013 This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications
293. tone the current telephone number can be manually stored and redialled afterwards Speed Personal Personal Programming with the Feature Number 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Dialling System System Programming Personal System Quick Dialling System Programming 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Hot Line Personal Programming with the Feature Number 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Incoming Call Log Caller ID information is automatically stored 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log corresponding buttons Valid Input Displayed while Input Entering Description 0 9 0 9 X ft Store digits X and by pressing the PAUSE Pause Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE button 1 5 2 7 Pause Insertion Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Displayed while Entering Description Input FLASH RECALL F Store an EFA signal EFA mode by pressing the Hooking FLASH RECALL button at the beginning of the number 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA INTERCOM Secret or Prevent all or part of a System Speed Dialling number or One touch Dialling number from being displayed when a call is made by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be hidden Secret Dialling It is programmable whether the hidden part will be shown on SMDR 1 20 1 Station Message Detail Recording Feature CONF Hyphen 2 Store a hyphen by pressing th
294. ue suc Ce 08 Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 13 1 2 Conference Call Forwarding to CO Line cies oojaa sac 08 Disable continue ej Feature amp Programming References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Feature Guide 255 3 3 PT Programming Executive Busy Override 87 98 susc son 08 m Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override DND Override 609 To continue DTA sac ue 08 X Disable lt To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Parallelled Telephone 61 uds NRI To continue OOO suas ore 08 X Disable continue 0 Feature amp Programming References 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 256 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming TAM Extension 611 uius ee ee eet BR ape ee To continue OOO te a or 08 Disable continue Feature amp Programming References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Room Monitor 612 eee To continue s 2 e E for 08 X Disable continue Note Extensions that are to be monitored must have their jacks set to Enable in this programme in adva
295. ure Guide 263 3 3 PT Programming 264 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern i I 1 l PREV prev i3 1 ECCE LEE ECL To vue DOO Ge suec ue 2 X Ao Triple S Double Te continue Note It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in Extension Ring Tone Pattern 115 and CO Line Ring Tone Pattern 423 Feature amp Programming References 1 1 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Access Tone hs PREV 22 To continue 7 7 2 X Enable Disable SCE SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 10 2 Room Monitor 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Ring Time mem MOSSES AS TS aes Sn To continue Oe 2 15 30 s To continue SELECT Feature amp Programming References 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Door Open Duration 709 NEXT or PREV CS Sasa Se ee To continue OG 2 X 1 8 s To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 15 2 Door Open Doorphone Ring Chime 71 m continue O00 a 5165 e 2 X Ring Chime Ring amp Chime To continue Feature amp Programming References 1 15 3 Doorbell Door Chime Doorphone Ringing Day Night Lunch 700 702 Doorphone Chime ner 711
296. ure Guide 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Pattern 4 Doorphone Chime Patterns The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door chimes are connected to the PBX Pattern 1 16 Pattern 2 is Pattern 3 is Pattern 4 16 Pattern 5 is Pattern 6 is Pattern 7 is Pattern 8 1s Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time Feature Guide 285 4 3 Revision History 4 3 4 3 1 Revision History Version 2 0 New Contents 1 5 2 6 CO Busy Out 1 8 3 Budget Management 1 20 2 Call Charge Calculation 3 3 2 Programming Procedures CO Busy Out 154 CO Busy Out Check Time 155 Call Charge Calculation Registering Leading Numbers 161 Call Charge Calculation Time Table 1 2 3 4 162 169 176 183 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Flat Charge and Duration 163 170 177 184 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 164 171 178 185 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Off Peak Flat Charge and Duration 165 172 1 79 186 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Peak Unit Charge and Duration 166 1 73 1 80 187 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Flat Charge and Duration 167 174 181 188 Call Charge Table 1 2 3 4 Economy Unit Charge and Duration 168 175 182 189 Decimal Places 190 Call Charge Calculation 441 Call Charge Table Assignment 442 LCD Display Mode 630 Currency 921 Call Charge Information SMDR Format 1 922
297. vate Music on Hold Installation Manual References 2 8 1 Connecting Peripherals 96 Feature Guide 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 5 Consultation Hold Description When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer 1 11 1 Call Transfer Call Splitting gt 1 12 3 Call Splitting or tries to establish a conference call 1 13 1 2 Conference the call is automatically placed on consultation hold When the operation is completed or cancelled the consultation hold is released Feature Guide 97 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 Conference Features 1 13 1 1 Conference Features OVERVIEW Description The following features are available to establish a conference call Feature Description Details in Conference An extension user can establish a 3 party or 5 party 1 13 1 2 conference call Conference Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to 1 7 2 Executive establish a 3 party conference call Busy Override 98 Feature Guide 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 2 Conference Description An extension user can establish a conference call The following Conference features are available Feature Description 3 party Conference During a 2 party conversation an extension user can add a third party to the conversation thereby establishing a 3 party conference call Unattended Conference The proprietary te
298. ware 2 3 7 Firmware Upgrade Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside CO lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX TEA308 Maintenance Console software or after the PBX data has been cleared 2 3 5 Automatic Configuration for Outside CO Line Type Advanced Hybrid System This PBX supports the connection of PTs Direct Station Selection DSS Consoles and single line devices such as SLTs fax machines wireless telephones and data terminals n this manual proprietary telephone PT means an analogue proprietary telephone APT Feature Guide 5 Table of Contents 1 Call Handling 2225 lt lt 1 1 1 14 1 1 1 Incoming Outside CO Line Call Features era te Peces recs 14 Td DBirectlh Line DII rtr re trt cec es Pte Pedes 14 15 1 1 2 Internal Call PAU a 16 1 1 3 Incoming Call Indication Seeman 17 1 1 3 1 Incoming Call Indication 17 1 1 3 2 Outside CO Line Ringing
299. will not function if the call duration counter is set to Instantly when Reverse Signal Detection is disabled e When acall is disconnected due to the Extension to CO Line Call Duration 212 timer if the call charge is set to increase at the same time as disconnection the increase will not be registered by the PBX e When Flat Duration is set to 0 the total of the Flat Charge and Unit Charge is charged immediately after the preprogrammed length of time Call Duration Counter Start 204 or the outside party answers the call When Unit Duration is set to 0 the Flat Charge is charged immediately after the preprogrammed length of time or the outside party answers the call Then the Unit Charge is charged just once when the Flat Duration expires Example a Flat Duration O s Flat Charge 0 Unit Duration 60 s Unit Charge 10 Charge Waiting time before the call duration counter starts t 60s Duration b Flat Duration 0 s Flat Charge 100 Unit Duration 60 s Unit Charge 10 Charge 140 130 120 110 Waiting time before the call duration counter starts 60s Duration C Flat Duration 0 s Flat Charge 10 Unit Duration 0 s Unit Charge 0 n this case Flat Duration and Unit Duration could be any value Charge Waiting time before the 19 call duration counter starts Duration d Flat Duration 60 s Flat Charge 10 Unit Duration 0 s Unit Charge 100 Charge W
300. with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Unscreened Conditions System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party Call Transfer to CO Line 606 Single line telephone SLT users cannot transfer calls to an outside party Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period Transfer Recall Time 201 the call will return to the extension that transferred the call If there is no answer for 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts the call will be disconnected Camp on Transfer for Call Transfer without Announcement Call Transfer without Announcement is possible while hearing a busy tone or while hearing a ringback tone after executing Busy Station Signalling BSS When the destination extension becomes idle the transferred call starts ringing automatically at that extension This is called Camp on Transfer One touch Transfer Direct Station Selection DSS Console users and proprietary telephone PT users can hold an outside CO line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly One touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 005 A flexible CO DSS MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button Music if available is sent to the held outside party while the ca

Panasonic KX-TEA308 Feature Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents